Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module Configuration Guide 9.11(0.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2017 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................32 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................32 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
Entering CLI commands Using an SSH Connection..............................................................................................49 Executing Local CLI Scripts Using an SSH Connection........................................................................................49 Boot Process.................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Default Configuration...........................
Synchronizing Log Messages......................................................................................................................................... 76 Enabling Timestamp on Syslog Messages.................................................................................................................... 77 Enabling Secure Management Mode.............................................................................................................................77 Enabling Secured CLI Mode....
Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs................................................................. 104 Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN groups............................................................................................................ 105 Configuring ACL VLAN Groups and Configuring FP Blocks for VLAN Parameters...............................................106 Configuring ACL VLAN Groups.......................................................................
Configure Route Map Filters......................................................................................................................................... 129 Configuring Match Routes............................................................................................................................................ 129 Configuring Set Conditions...........................................................................................................................................
Displaying BFD for BGP Information...................................................................................................................... 154 Configure BFD for VRRP...............................................................................................................................................158 Related Configuration Tasks....................................................................................................................................
Enabling BGP............................................................................................................................................................ 182 Enabling MBGP Configurations.............................................................................................................................. 212 BGP Regular Expression Optimization.........................................................................................................................213 Debugging BGP.......
DCB Configuration Exchange................................................................................................................................. 251 Configuration Source Election................................................................................................................................252 Propagation of DCB Information............................................................................................................................
Fibre Channel over Ethernet.........................................................................................................................................287 Ensure Robustness in a Converged Ethernet Network............................................................................................ 287 FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges.............................................................................................................................. 289 FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack.....
21 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).............................................................................................. 319 Important Points to Remember.................................................................................................................................... 319 Configure GVRP............................................................................................................................................................. 319 Related Configuration Tasks....
Enabling a Physical Interface........................................................................................................................................ 347 Physical Interfaces......................................................................................................................................................... 347 Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces....................................................................................................
Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces....................................................................................................................... 369 Maintenance Using TDR......................................................................................................................................... 370 Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports...........................................................................................................................
Important Points to Remember............................................................................................................................. 396 Enabling UDP Helper............................................................................................................................................... 397 Configurations Using UDP Helper................................................................................................................................
Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface..........................................................................................416 Clearing IPv6 Routes................................................................................................................................................417 Secure Shell (SSH) Over an IPv6 Transport............................................................................................................... 417 28 iSCSI Optimization......................
Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel.....................................................................................................452 Reassigning an Interface to a New Port Channel................................................................................................454 Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel.............................................................................. 455 Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces...................................
Clearing LLDP Counters............................................................................................................................................... 480 Debugging LLDP.............................................................................................................................................................481 Relevant Management Objects....................................................................................................................................
Related Configuration Tasks.................................................................................................................................... 517 Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally....................................................................................................................... 517 Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances.................................................................................................................
OSPF ACK Packing................................................................................................................................................. 554 Setting OSPF Adjacency with Cisco Routers...................................................................................................... 554 Configuration Information.............................................................................................................................................
Important Points to Remember............................................................................................................................. 603 Enabling PIM-SSM........................................................................................................................................................ 603 Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts................................................................................................................
Configuring Port-Based Rate Shaping..................................................................................................................638 Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets......................................................... 638 Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with Multiple traffic class................................. 639 Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and Color-Marking...............................................
Adding and Removing Interfaces.................................................................................................................................683 Modifying Global Parameters....................................................................................................................................... 684 Enable BPDU Filtering Globally....................................................................................................................................
Creating Access and Trunk Ports...........................................................................................................................725 Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN....................................................................................................................... 725 Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag.......................................................................... 726 Configuring Options for Trunk Ports...........................
Setting Up User-Based Security (SNMPv3).............................................................................................................. 749 Reading Managed Object Values.................................................................................................................................750 Displaying the Ports in a VLAN using SNMP.............................................................................................................. 751 Fetching Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP.
Upgrading a Single Stack Unit......................................................................................................................................776 54 Storm Control.......................................................................................................................................... 777 Configure Storm Control...............................................................................................................................................
Setting the Time for the Software Clock................................................................................................................... 802 Setting the Timezone....................................................................................................................................................803 Setting Daylight Savings Time.....................................................................................................................................
Configuring an NPIV Proxy Gateway...........................................................................................................................837 Enabling Fibre Channel Capability on the Switch................................................................................................ 838 Creating a DCB Map ..............................................................................................................................................
Configuring VLT....................................................................................................................................................... 869 Configuring a VLT Interconnect.............................................................................................................................869 Configuring a VLT Backup Link..............................................................................................................................
67 Debugging and Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................914 Supported Modes...........................................................................................................................................................914 Debugging Aggregator Operation.................................................................................................................................
Enabling Data Center Bridging............................................................................................................................... 948 QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment....................................................................................949 Configure Enhanced Transmission Selection....................................................................................................... 950 Configure a DCBx Operation...................................
1 About this Guide This guide describes the supported protocols and software features, and provides configuration instructions and examples, for the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Dell Networking FN IOM is available with running Dell Networking OS version 9.9(0.0). The FN IOM is installed in a Dell PowerEdge FX2 server chassis. For information about how to install and perform the initial switch configuration, refer to the Getting Started Guides on the Dell Support website at http://www.dell.
CAUTION: The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. WARNING: The Warning icon signals information about hardware handling that could result in injury. * (Exception). This symbol is a note associated with additional text on the page that is marked with an asterisk.
2 Before You Start To install the FN IOM in a Dell FX2 server chassis, use the instructions in the Dell Networking FN IOM Getting Started Guide that is shipped with the product. The FN IOM installs with zero-touch configuration. After you power it on, it boots up with default settings and autoconfigures with software features enabled. This topic describes the default settings and software features that are automatically configured at startup.
Standalone mode is the zero-touch auto configuration default mode. If you want the flexibility to configure different settings, change the FN I/O Module to PMUX mode. PMUX mode provides additional CLI commands to customize the software configuration, as needed. You can configure any of the external Ethernet ports to operate as stack links. For more information on the PMUX mode, see PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator.
Other Auto-Configured Settings After the Aggregator powers on, it auto-configures and is operational with software features enabled, including: • Ports: Ports are administratively up and auto-configured to operate as hybrid ports to transmit tagged and untagged VLAN traffic.For more information about how ports are numbered, refer to Port Numbering. • Link aggregation: All uplink ports are configured in a single LAG (LAG 128). • VLANs: All ports are configured as members of all (4094) VLANs.
When an aggregator powers up, it monitors known TCP ports for iSCSI storage devices on all interfaces. When a session is detected, an entry is created and monitored as long as the session is active. The Aggregator also detects iSCSI storage devices on all interfaces and autoconfigures to optimize performance. Performance optimization operations, such as Jumbo frame size support and disabling storm control on interfaces connected to an iSCSI equallogic (EQL) storage device, are applied automatically.
Where to Go From Here You can customize the Aggregator for use in your data center network as necessary. To perform additional switch configuration, do one of the following: • For remote out-of-band management, enter the OOB management interface IP address into a Telnet or SSH client and log in to the switch using the user ID and password to access the CLI. • For local management using the CLI, use the attached console connection.
3 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels. In Dell Networking OS, after you enable a command, it is entered into the running configuration file.
CLI Modes Different sets of commands are available in each mode. A command found in one mode cannot be executed from another mode (except for EXEC mode commands with a preceding do command (refer to the do Command section). The Dell Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level.
Table 1. Dell Command Modes CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command EXEC Dell> Access the router through the console or Telnet. EXEC Privilege Dell# • • CONFIGURATION Dell(conf)# From EXEC mode, enter the enable command. From any other mode, use the end command. • From EXEC privilege mode, enter the configure command. • From every mode except EXEC and EXEC Privilege, enter the exit command. NOTE: Access all of the following modes from CONFIGURATION mode.
Dell# Undoing Commands When you enter a command, the command line is added to the running configuration file (running-config). To disable a command and remove it from the running-config, enter the no command, then the original command. For example, to delete an IP address configured on an interface, use the no ip address ip-address command. NOTE: Use the help or ? command as described in Obtaining Help.
Entering and Editing Commands Notes for entering commands. • The CLI is not case-sensitive. • You can enter partial CLI keywords. • Enter the minimum number of letters to uniquely identify a command. For example, you cannot enter cl as a partial keyword because both the clock and class-map commands begin with the letters “cl.” You can enter clo, however, as a partial keyword because only one command begins with those three letters. • The TAB key auto-completes keywords in commands.
Filtering show Command Outputs Filter the output of a show command to display specific information by adding | [except | find | grep | no-more | save] specified_text after the command. The variable specified_text is the text for which you are filtering and it IS case sensitive unless you use the ignore-case suboption. Starting with Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, the grep command accepts an ignore-case sub-option that forces the search to case-insensitive.
The save command copies the output to a file for future reference. NOTE: You can filter a single command output multiple times. The save option must be the last option entered. For example: Dell# command | grep regular-expression | except regular-expression | grep other-regularexpression | find regular-expression | save. Multiple Users in Configuration Mode Dell notifies all users when there are multiple users logged in to CONFIGURATION mode.
4 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) during which the route processor module (RPM), switch fabric module (SFM), and line card status light emitting diodes (LEDs) blink green. The system then loads the Dell Networking operating system. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption.
Console Access The switch has two management ports available for system access: a serial console port and an out-of-bounds (OOB) port. Serial Console A universal serial bus (USB) (A-Type) connector is located at the front panel. The USB can be defined as an External Serial Console (RS-232) port, and is labeled on the chassis. The USB is present on the lower side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis, as shown.
Serial Console 48 Getting Started
External Serial Port with a USB Connector The following table list the pin assignments. Table 2. Pin Assignments USB Pin Number Signal Name Pin 1 RTS Pin 2 RX Pin 3 TX Pin 4 CTS Pin 5, 6 GND RxD Chassis GND Accessing the CLI Interface and Running Scripts Using SSH In addition to the capability to access a device using a console connection or a Telnet session, you can also use SSH for secure, protected communication with the device. You can open an SSH session and run commands or script files.
• To avoid denial of service (DoS) attacks, a rate-limit of 10 concurrent sessions per minute in SSH is devised. Therefore, you might experience a failure in executing SSH-related scripts when multiple short SSH commands are executed. • If you issue an interactive command in the SSH session, the behavior may not really be interactive.
IOM Boot Label 4.0.1.0 DRAM: 2 GB Initialized CPLD on CS3 Detected [XLP308 (Lite+) Rev A0] Initializing I2C0: speed = 30 KHz, prescaler = 0x0377 -- done. Initializing I2C1: speed = 100 KHz, prescaler = 0x0109 -- done. Initialized eMMC Host Controller Detected SD Card Now running in RAM - U-Boot [N64 ABI, Big-Endian] at: ffffffff8c100000 Flash: 256 MB PCIE (B0:D01:F0) : Link up. PCIE (B0:D01:F1) : No Link.
hostname name Example of the hostname Command Dell(conf)#hostname R1 R1(conf)# Configuring a Unique Host Name on the System While you can manually configure a host name for the system, you can also configure the system to have a unique host name. The unique host name is a combination of the platform type and the serial number of the system. The unique host name appears in the command prompt. The running configuration gets updated with the feature unique-name command.
3 • ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). • mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely. Management routes are separate from IP routes and are only used to manage the system through the management port. To configure a management route, use the following command.
enable [password | secret | sha256-password] [level level] [encryption-type] password • level: is the privilege level, is 15 by default, and is not required • encryption-type: specifies how you are inputting the password, is 0 by default, and is not required. • 0 is for inputting the password in clear text. • 5 is for inputting a password that is already encrypted using an MD5 hash. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another Dell Networking system.
NOTE: If all of the following conditions are true, the Portmode Hybrid configuration is not applied, because of the configuration process for server ports as switch ports by default: • The running configuration is saved in flash. • The startup configuration is deleted. • The switch is reloaded. • The saved configuration is copied to the running configuration.
• NOTE: When copying to a server, you can only use a host name if you have configured a DNS server. Save the running-configuration to the startup-configuration on the internal flash of the primary RPM. Then copy the new startupconfig file to the external flash of the primary RPM.
4 drwx 5 d--6 -rwx 7 -rwx 8 -rwx 9 -rwx 10 -rwx 11 -rwx 12 -rwx 13 -rwx 4096 4096 1272 10093 217155 5162 10507 4 6900 1244038 Feb Feb Apr Feb Feb Mar Mar May Feb Feb 17 17 29 17 22 02 03 06 17 13 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 00:28:02 00:28:02 16:15:14 20:48:02 23:14:34 04:02:58 01:17:16 22:05:06 04:43:12 04:27:16 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 CORE_DUMP_DIR ADMIN_DIR startup-config abhi-jan26.cfg show-tech-cfg.txt runn-feb6 abhi-feb7.
• Change the default directory. EXEC Privilege mode cd directory You can change the default storage location to the USB Flash, as shown. File management commands then apply to the USB Flash rather than the internal Flash. The bold lines show that no file system is specified and that the file is saved to an USB Flash.
You can specify either the management VRF or a nondefault VRF to configure the VRF awareness setting. When you specify the management VRF, the copy operation that is used to transfer files to and from an HTTP server utilizes the VRF table corresponding to the Management VRF to look up the destination. When you specify a nondefault VRF, the VRF table corresponding to that nondefault VRF is used to look up the HTTP server.
• hash-value: (Optional). Specify the relevant hash published on iSupport. • img-file: Enter the name of the Dell Networking software image file to validate Examples: Without Entering the Hash Value for Verification MD5 Dell# verify md5 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin MD5 hash for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin: 275ceb73a4f3118e1d6bcf7d75753459 SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 hash for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.
Mode Default Settings Enable and Disable ports All port enabled by default.
To re-enable UFD, use the following commands: Dell#configure Dell(conf)#uplink-state-group 1 Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-1)#enable Dell#show uplink-state-group Uplink State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Up Sample FN IOM commands and outputs In the following, port channel 128 is up. The port channel consists of ports TenGigabitEthernet 0/11 and TenGigabitEthernet 0/12.
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 1474 packets, 238933 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 204 over 64-byte pkts, 1071 over 127-byte pkts 175 over 255-byte pkts, 24 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 1198 Multicasts, 276 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
Verifying the Configurations When the port channel of the upstream switch is configured, the port channel on the FN IOM is up. A series of messages is logged on the system indicating port channel 128 and the ports connected to the servers downstream are up. Changed interface state to up: Po 128 Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: Te 0/1 Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: Te 0/2 Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: Te 0/3 …etc.
5 Management Dell Networking OS supports management. This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system.
Creating a Custom Privilege Level Custom privilege levels start with the default EXEC mode command set. You can then customize privilege levels 2-14 by: • removing commands from the EXEC mode commands • moving commands from EXEC Privilege mode to EXEC mode • allowing access to CONFIGURATION mode commands • allowing access to INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and ROUTER mode commands You can access all commands at your privilege level and below.
privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} 2 Move a command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} 3 Allow access to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec configure level level 4 Allow access to INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode. Specify all keywords in the command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...
interface Select an interface to configure Dell(conf)#interface ? loopback Loopback interface managementethernet Management Ethernet interface null Null interface port-channel Port-channel interface range Configure interface range tengigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface vlan VLAN interface Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#? end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from interface configuration mode Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#exit Dell(conf)#line ? console Primary terminal
• Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer • Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor • Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Audit and Security Logs This section describes how to configure, display, and clear audit and security logs.
When you enabled RBAC and extended logging: • Only the system administrator user role can execute this command. • The system administrator and system security administrator user roles can view security events and system events. • The system administrator user roles can view audit, security, and system events. • Only the system administrator and security administrator user roles can view security logs. • The network administrator and network operator user roles can view system events.
Example of Configuring the Logging Message Format Dell(conf)#logging version ? <0-1> Select syslog version (default = 0) Dell(conf)#logging version 1 Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server You can use reverse tunneling with the port forwarding to securely connect to a syslog server. Figure 1.
In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.48 and the listening port is 5141. The switch IP address is 10.16.131.141 and the listening port is 5140 ssh -R 5140:10.156.166.48:5141 admin@10.16.131.141 -nNf 3 Configure logging to a local host. locahost is “127.0.0.1” or “::1”. If you do not, the system displays an error when you attempt to enable role-based only AAA authorization. Dell(conf)# logging localhost tcp port Dell(conf)#logging 127.0.0.
Configuration Task List for System Log Management There are two configuration tasks for system log management: • Disabling System Logging • Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server Disabling System Logging By default, logging is enabled and log messages are sent to the logging buffer, all terminal lines, the console, and the syslog servers. To disable system logging, use the following commands. • Disable all logging except on the console.
Changing System Logging Settings You can change the default settings of the system logging by changing the severity level and the storage location. The default is to log all messages up to debug level, that is, all system messages. By changing the severity level in the logging commands, you control the number of system messages logged. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. • Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the logging buffer.
Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration To display the current contents of the logging buffer and the logging settings for the system, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode. When RBAC is enabled, the security logs are filtered based on the user roles. Only the security administrator and the system administrator can view the security logs.
• kern (for kernel messages) • local0 (for local use) • local1 (for local use) • local2 (for local use) • local3 (for local use) • local4 (for local use) • local5 (for local use) • local6 (for local use) • local7 (for local use) • lpr (for line printer system messages) • mail (for mail system messages) • news (for USENET news messages) • sys9 (system use) • sys10 (system use) • sys11 (system use) • sys12 (system use) • sys13 (system use) • sys14 (system use) • syslog (fo
You can configure multiple virtual terminals at one time by entering a number and an end-number. 2 Configure a level and set the maximum number of messages to print. LINE mode logging synchronous [level severity-level | all] [limit] Configure the following optional parameters: • level severity-level: the range is from 0 to 7. The default is 2. Use the all keyword to include all messages. • limit: the range is from 20 to 300. The default is 20.
To disable the secure mode, use no enable secure command. For the changes to take effect, save the configuration and reboot the system. Once the system exits secure mode, all the restrictions are gone. CMC is able to learn the status when it readsswitch.xml and lifts the restrictions for the switch. NOTE: When you add a switch in an existing stack which is in secure mode, reboot the new switch twice for it to enter into the secure mode.
Configuring FTP Server Parameters After you enable the FTP server on the system, you can configure different parameters. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. • Specify the directory for users using FTP to reach the system. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server topdir dir • The default is the internal flash directory. Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password.
Terminal Lines You can access the system remotely and restrict access to the system by creating user profiles. Terminal lines on the system provide different means of accessing the system. The virtual terminal lines (VTYs) connect you through Telnet to the system. Denying and Permitting Access to a Terminal Line Dell Networking recommends applying only standard access control lists (ACLs) to deny and permit access to VTY lines.
enable Prompt for the enable password. line Prompt for the password you assigned to the terminal line. Configure a password for the terminal line to which you assign a method list that contains the line authentication method. Configure a password using the password command from LINE mode. local Prompt for the system username and password. none Do not authenticate the user. radius Prompt for a username and password and use a RADIUS server to authenticate.
no exec-timeout Example of Setting the Time Out Period for EXEC Privilege Mode The following example shows how to set the time-out period and how to view the configuration using the show config command from LINE mode. Dell(conf)#line con 0 Dell(config-line-console)#exec-timeout 0 Dell(config-line-console)#show config line console 0 exec-timeout 0 0 Dell(config-line-console)# Using Telnet to get to Another Network Device To telnet to another device, use the following commands. • Telnet to the stack-unit.
• Set manual lock using the configure terminal lock command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you configure a manual lock, which is the default, you must enter this command each time you want to enter CONFIGURATION mode and deny access to others. Viewing the Configuration Lock Status If you attempt to enter CONFIGURATION mode when another user has locked it, you may view which user has control of CONFIGURATION mode using the show configuration lock command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configuring Concurrent Session Limit To configure concurrent session limit, follow this procedure: • Limit the number of concurrent sessions for all users. CONFIGURATION mode login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4.
3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 4 vty 2 10.14.1.97 5 vty 3 10.14.1.97 Kill existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: Track Login Activity Dell Networking OS enables you to track the login activity of users and view the successful and unsuccessful login events.
Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command. Example of the show login statistics Command The show login statistics command displays the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell#show login statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
7 Copy startup-config.bak to the running config. EXEC Privilege mode copy flash://startup-config.bak running-config 8 Remove all authentication statements you might have for the console. LINE mode no authentication login no password 9 Save the running-config. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config 10 Set the system parameters to use the startup configuration file when the system reloads. uBoot mode setenv stconfigignore false 11 Save the running-config.
Recovering from a Failed Start A system that does not start correctly might be attempting to boot from a corrupted Dell Networking OS image or from a mis-specified location. In this case, you can restart the system and interrupt the boot process to point the system to another boot location. Use the setenv command, as described in the following steps.
6 802.1X 802.1X is a method of port security. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity can be verified (through a username and password, for example). This feature is named for its IEEE specification. 802.
Figure 2. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS 802.
Figure 3. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
The Port-Authentication Process The authentication process begins when the authenticator senses that a link status has changed from down to up: 1 When the authenticator senses a link state change, it requests that the supplicant identify itself using an EAP Identity Request frame. 2 The supplicant responds with its identity in an EAP Response Identity frame.
EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 5. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1 Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
Important Points to Remember • The Dell Networking OS supports 802.1X with EAP-MD5, EAP-OTP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and MS-CHAPv2 with PEAP. • 802.1X is not supported on port-channels or port-channel members. Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally and at a interface level. Figure 6. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2 Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3 Enable 802.
dot1x authentication Example of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally Example of Verifying 802.1X is Enabled on an Interface Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode. The bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. Dell#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 2.2.2.
NOTE: There are several reasons why the supplicant might fail to respond; for example, the supplicant might have been booting when the request arrived or there might be a physical layer problem. To configure re-transmissions, use the following commands. • Configure the amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) • The default is 30.
Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED Re-Authentication: Disable Untagged VLAN id: None Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 2 Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds Server Timeout: 30 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 3600 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port IEEE 802.1X requires that a port can be manually placed into any of three states: • ForceAuthorized — an authorized state.
Re-Authenticating a Port You can configure the authenticator for periodic re-authentication. After the supplicant has been authenticated, and the port has been authorized, you can configure the authenticator to re-authenticate the supplicant periodically. If you enable re-authentication, the supplicant is required to re-authenticate every 3600 seconds, but you can configure this interval. You can configure a maximum number of re-authentications as well.
dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds The range is from 1 to 300. • The default is 30. Terminate the authentication process due to an unresponsive authentication server. INTERFACE mode dot1x server-timeout seconds The range is from 1 to 300. The default is 30. Example of Viewing Configured Server Timeouts The example shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator terminates the authentication process for an unresponsive supplicant or server after 15 seconds.
The illustration shows the configuration on the Dell Networking system before connecting the end user device in black and blue text, and after connecting the device in red text. The blue text corresponds to the preceding numbered steps on dynamic VLAN assignment with 802.1X. Figure 7. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1 Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration in Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication).
some dumb-terminals, such as network printers, do not have 802.1X capability and therefore cannot authenticate themselves. To be able to connect such devices, they must be allowed access the network without compromising network security. The Guest VLAN 802.1X extension addresses this limitation with regard to non-802.1X capable devices and the Authentication-fail VLAN 802.1X extension addresses this limitation with regard to external users.
View your configuration using the show config command from INTERFACE mode, as shown in the example in Configuring a Guest VLAN or using the show dot1x interface command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf-if-gi-2/1)#dot1x port-control force-authorized Dell(conf-if-gi-2/1)#do show dot1x interface gigabitethernet 2/1 802.
7 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This chapter describes the access control list (ACL) VLAN group and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements.
• Whether the maximum number of groups in the system has exceeded • Whether the maximum number of VLAN numbers permitted per ACL group has exceeded • When a VLAN member that is being added is already a part of another ACL group After these verification steps are performed, the ACL manager considers the command as valid and sends the information to the ACL agent on the line card.
• If you do not attach an ACL to any of the ports, the FP entries are deleted. Similarly, when the same ACL is applied on a set of ports, only one set of entries is installed in the FP, thereby effectively saving CAM space. The optimization is enabled only if you specify the optimized option with the ip access-group command. This option is not valid for VLAN and LAG interfaces.
Group Name : HostGroup Egress IP Acl : Group5 Vlan Members : 1,1000 Dell# Configuring FP Blocks for VLAN Parameters Use the cam-acl-vlan command to allocate the number of FP blocks for the various VLAN processes on the system. You can use the no version of this command to reset the number of FP blocks to default. By default, 0 groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP. ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default, and you need to allocate the slices for CAM optimization.
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 | | | | | --More-- 1 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | IN-L3 ACL IN-L3 FIB IN-L3-SysFlow IN-L3-TrcList IN-L3-McastFib IN-L3-Qos IN-L3-PBR IN-V6 ACL IN-V6 FIB IN-V6-SysFlow IN-V6-McastFib OUT-L2 ACL OUT-L3 ACL OUT-V6 ACL IN-L2 ACL IN-L2 FIB IN-L3 ACL IN-L3 FIB IN-L3-SysFlow | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 12288 262141 2878 1024 9215 8192 1024 0 0 0 0 1024 1024 0 320 32768 12288 262141 2878 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2 14 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113
Allocating FP Blocks for VLAN Processes The VLAN ContentAware Processor (VCAP) application is a preingress CAP that modifies the VLAN settings before packets are forwarded. To support the ACL CAM optimization functionality, the CAM carving feature is enhanced. A total of four VACP groups are present, of which two are for fixed groups and the other two are for dynamic groups. Out of the total of two dynamic groups, you can allocate zero, one, or two FP blocks to iSCSI Counters, OpenFlow and ACL Optimization.
8 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, ACLs, prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
• Applying a Filter to a Prefix List (OSPF) • ACL Resequencing • Resequencing an ACL or Prefix List • Route Maps • Important Points to Remember • Configuration Task List for Route Maps • Creating a Route Map • Configure Route Map Filters • Configuring Match Routes • Configuring Set Conditions • Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution • Configure a Route Map for Route Tagging • Continue Clause • Logging of ACL Processes • Guidelines for Configuring ACL Logging • Configur
Implementing ACL on the Dell Networking OS You can assign one IP ACL per interface with the Dell Networking OS. If you do not assign an IP ACL to an interface, it is not used by the software in any other capacity. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. If you enable counters on IP ACL rules that are already configured, those counters are reset when a new rule is inserted or prepended.
Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.1.1.
• FO = 0 means it is either the first fragment or the packet is a non-fragment. • FO > 0 means it is dealing with the fragments of the original packet. Permit an ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present: If a packet’s L3 information matches the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked. • If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is permitted. • If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL entry is processed.
To view the rules of a particular ACL configured on a particular interface, use the show ip accounting access-list ACL-name interface interface command in EXEC Privilege mode. Example of Viewing the Rules of a Specific ACL on an Interface Example of the seq Command to Order Filters Dell#show ip accounting access-list ToOspf interface gig 1/6 Standard IP access list ToOspf seq 5 deny any seq 10 deny 10.2.0.0 /16 seq 15 deny 10.3.0.0 /16 seq 20 deny 10.4.0.0 /16 seq 25 deny 10.5.0.0 /16 seq 30 deny 10.6.0.
To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip accounting access example interface gig 4/12 Extended IP access list example seq 15 deny udp any any eq 111 seq 20 deny udp any any eq 2049 seq 25 deny udp any any eq 31337 seq 30 deny tcp any any range 12345 12346 seq 35 permit udp host 10.21.126.225 10.4.5.0 /28 seq 40 permit udp host 10.21.126.226 10.4.5.0 /28 seq 45 permit udp 10.8.0.0 /16 10.50.188.
Configuring Filters Without a Sequence Number If you are creating an extended ACL with only one or two filters, you can let the system assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured. The system assigns filters in multiples of five. To configure a filter for an extended IP ACL without a specified sequence number, use any or all of the following commands: • Configure a deny or permit filter to examine IP packets.
• L2 ingress access list • L3 egress access list • L2 egress access list • L3 ingress access list If a rule is simply appended, existing counters are not affected. Table 4. L2 and L3 Filtering on Switched Packets L2 ACL Behavior L3 ACL Behavior Decision on Targeted Traffic Deny Deny L3 ACL denies. Deny Permit L3 ACL permits. Permit Deny L3 ACL denies. Permit Permit L3 ACL permits. NOTE: If you configure an interface as a vlan-stack access port, only the L2 ACL filters the packets.
INTERFACE mode ip access-list [standard | extended] name To view which IP ACL is applied to an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode, or use the show runningconfig command in EXEC mode. Example of Viewing ACLs Applied to an Interface Dell(conf-if)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.2.1.100 255.255.255.0 ip access-group nimule in no shutdown Dell(conf-if)# To filter traffic on Telnet sessions, use only standard ACLs in the access-class command.
Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on tengigethernet 0/0 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.2 Configure Egress ACLs Configuring egress ACLs onto physical interfaces protects the system infrastructure from attack — malicious and incidental — by explicitly allowing only authorized traffic. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation.
permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} count Dell Networking OS Behavior: Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) hellos and internet group management protocol (IGMP) packets are not affected when you enable egress ACL filtering for CPU traffic. Packets sent by the CPU with the source address as the VRRP virtual IP address have the interface MAC address instead of VRRP virtual MAC address. IP Prefix Lists IP prefix lists control routing policy.
Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1 Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32).
{deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (from 0 to 32). • le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to be matched (from 0 to 32). Example of Creating a Filter with a Dell Networking OS-Assigned Sequence Numbers The example shows a prefix list in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command. Apply the prefix list to all traffic redistributed into the routing process. The traffic is either forwarded or dropped, depending on the criteria and actions specified in the prefix list. To apply a filter to routes in RIP, use the following commands. • Enter RIP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router rip • Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes.
Example of Viewing Configured Prefix Lists (ROUTER OSPF mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. Dell(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.1 distribute-list prefix awe in Dell(conf-router_ospf)# ACL Resequencing ACL resequencing allows you to re-number the rules and remarks in an access or prefix list.
Example of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number Example of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have Different Numbers The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2. Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command.
Route Maps Similar to ACLs and prefix lists, route maps are composed of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action; however, route maps can change the packets meeting the criterion. ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.
The optional seq keyword allows you to assign a sequence number to the route map instance. Example of Viewing a Configured Route Map Example of Multiple Instances of a Route-Map Example of Deleting One Instance of a Route Map Example of Viewing All Instances of a Specified Route Map The default action is permit and the default sequence number starts at 10. When you use the keyword deny in configuring a route map, routes that meet the match filters are not redistributed.
Configure Route Map Filters Within ROUTE-MAP mode, there are match and set commands. • match commands search for a certain criterion in the routes. • set commands change the characteristics of routes, either adding something or specifying a level. When there are multiple match commands with the same parameter under one instance of route-map, the system does a match between all of those match commands.
• • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip address prefix-list-name • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} • Match source routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4).
CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set tag tag-value To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of set commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of set filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution Route maps on their own cannot affect traffic and must be included in different commands to affect routing traffic.
Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found. The following example shows a continue clause at the end of a route-map module. In this example, if a match is found in the route-map “test” module 10, module 30 is processed.
If the packet contains an unidentified EtherType or transport layer protocol, the values for these parameters are saved as Unknown in the log message. If you also enable the logging of the count of packets in the ACL entry, and if the logging is deactivated in a specific interval because the threshold has exceeded, the count of packets that exceeded the logging threshold value during that interval is recorded when the subsequent log record (in the next interval) is generated for that ACL entry.
IPv6 ACLs, and standard and extended MAC ACLs. Configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [log [interval minutes]] Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only the specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface.
The port mirroring application maintains a database that contains all monitoring sessions (including port monitor sessions). It has information regarding the sessions that are enabled for flow-based monitoring and those sessions that are not enabled for flow-based monitoring. It downloads monitoring configuration to the ACL agent whenever the ACL agent is registered with the port mirroring application or when flow-based monitoring is enabled.
flow-based enable 2 Define access-list rules that include the keyword monitor. Dell Networking OS only considers port monitoring traffic that matches rules with the keyword monitor. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list For more information, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Apply the ACL to the monitored port.
9 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
NOTE: The Dell Networking operating system does not support multi-hop BFD sessions. If a system does not receive a control packet within an agreed-upon amount of time, the BFD agent changes the session state to Down. It then notifies the BFD manager of the change and sends a control packet to the neighbor that indicates the state change (though it might not be received if the link or receiving interface is faulty).
Field Description State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function. If the poll bit is set, the receiving system must respond as soon as possible, without regard to its transmit interval. The responding system clears the poll bit and sets the final bit in its response. The poll and final bits are used during the handshake and in Demand mode (refer to BFD Sessions).
Passive The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system. A BFD session has two modes: Asynchronous mode In Asynchronous mode, both systems send periodic control messages at an agreed upon interval to indicate that their session status is Up.’ Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator.
Figure 9.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 10. Session State Changes Important Points to Remember • BFD for line card ports is hitless, but is not hitless for VLANs because they are instantiated on the RPM.
• Configure BFD for Port-Channels • Configure BFD for Static Routes • Configure BFD for OSPF • Configure BFD for OSPFv3 • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configure BFD for VLANs • Configuring Protocol Liveness • Troubleshooting BFD Configure BFD for Physical Ports BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol.
Changing Physical Port Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role (active). The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. Configure these parameters per interface; if you change a parameter, the change affects all physical port sessions on that interface. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends maintaining the default values. Change session parameters for all sessions on an interface.
INTERFACE mode bfd enable If you disable BFD on a local interface, this message displays: R1(conf-if-gi-4/24)#01:00:52: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Ad Dn for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Gi 4/24 (diag: 0) If the remote system state changes due to the local state administration being down, this message displays: R2>01:32:53: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Down for neighbor 2.2.2.
CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd Example of the show bfd neighbors Command to Verify Static Routes To verify that sessions have been created for static routes, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows BFD for static routes is enabled. R1(conf)#ip route 2.2.3.0/24 2.2.2.2 R1(conf)#ip route bfd R1(conf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.
• When a destination prefix is deleted from the prefix-list using the no permit option, the corresponding BFD session is torn down immediately. In this scenario, the BFD session tear down occurs only if the other destination prefixes in the prefix-list are not pointing to the same neighbor. • The permit option enables creation of a BFD session for the specified static destination prefix or prefix range.
Related Configuration Tasks • • Changing OSPF Session Parameters Disabling BFD for OSPF Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 12.
• Establish sessions with OSPF neighbors on a single interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.
no bfd all-neighbors • Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on an interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors. NOTE: BFD for OSPFv3 with ECMP is not supported.
ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] • Change parameters for OSPFv3 sessions on a single interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state.
Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: • By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). • By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
bfd enable 2 Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3 Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4 Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 5 Configure parameters for a BFD session established with all neighbors discovered by BGP.
Use BFD in a BGP Peer Group You can establish a BFD session for the members of a peer group (the neighbor peer-group-name bfd command in ROUTER BGP configuration mode). Members of the peer group may have BFD: • Explicitly enabled (the neighbor ip-address bfd command) • Explicitly disabled (the neighbor ip-address bfd disable command) • Inherited (neither explicitly enabled or disabled) according to the current BFD configuration of the peer group.
Example of Verifying BGP Configuration Example of Viewing All BFD Neighbors Example of Viewing BFD Neighbor Detail Example of Viewing Configured BFD Counters Example of Viewing BFD Summary Information Example of Viewing BFD Information for a Specified Neighbor R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.
Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 0 0 0 The bold lines show the message displayed when you enable a BFD session with different configurations: • • • Message displayed when you enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor that inherits the global BFD session settings configured with the global bfd all-neighbors command. Message displayed when you enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor using the neighbor ip-address bfd command.
Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM). BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in VRRP. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent on the line card notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the VRRP protocol that a link state change occurred.
• Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors. INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd all-neighbors Establishing VRRP Sessions on VRRP Neighbors The master router does not care about the state of the backup router, so it does not participate in any VRRP BFD sessions. VRRP BFD sessions on the backup router cannot change to the UP state. Configure the master router to establish an individual VRRP session the backup router. To establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor, use the following command.
Changing VRRP Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. You can change parameters for all VRRP sessions or for a particular neighbor. To change parameters for all VRRP sessions or for a particular VRRP session, use the following commands. • Change parameters for all VRRP sessions.
1 Enable the BFD globally. Refer to Enabling BFD Globally. 2 Establish sessions with VLAN neighbors. Refer to Establish Sessions with VLAN Neighbors. Related Configuration Task • Changing VLAN Session Parameters. • Disabling BFD for VLANs. Establish Sessions with VLAN Neighbors To establish a session, enable BFD at interface level on both ends of the link, as shown in the following illustration. The session parameters do not need to match. Figure 15.
Changing VLAN Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. You can change parameters per interface, if you make a configuration change, the change affects all sessions on that interface.
Establish Sessions on Port-Channels To establish a session, you must enable BFD at interface level on both ends of the link, as shown in the following example. The session parameters do not need to match. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions on Port-Channels To establish a session on a port-channel, use the bfd neighbor ip-address command in INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode. View the established sessions using the show bfd neighbors command, as shown in Changing Port-Channel Session Parameters.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode bfd interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] View session parameters using the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for Port-Channels If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down. A final Admin Down control packet is sent to all neighbors, and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. To disable BFD for a port-channel, use the following command. • Disable BFD for a port-channel.
myDiscrim:6, yourDiscrim:4, minTx:1000000, minRx:1000000, multiplier:3, minEchoRx:0 00:54:38: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Up for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Gi 4/24 (diag: 0) The following example displays hexadecimal output from the debug bfd packet command.
10 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking operating system. BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17. Interior BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
Figure 19. BGP Router Rules 1 Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2 Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B.
preferences. BGP sees that the Weight criteria results in two potential “best paths” and moves to local preference to reduce the options. If a number of best paths are determined, this selection criteria is applied to group’s best to determine the ultimate best path. In non-deterministic mode (the bgp non-deterministic-med command is applied), paths are compared in the order in which they arrive.
b If you entered the bgp always-compare-med command, MEDs are compared for all paths. c Paths with no MED are treated as “worst” and assigned a MED of 4294967295. 7 Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths. 8 Prefer the path with the lowest IGP metric to the BGP if next-hop is selected when synchronization is disabled and only an internal path remains.
Figure 21. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 22. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
Implement BGP with the Dell Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on the Dell Networking OS. Additional Path (Add-Path) Support The add-path feature reduces convergence times by advertising multiple paths to its peers for the same address prefix without replacing existing paths with new ones. By default, a BGP speaker advertises only the best path to its peers for a given address prefix.
Ignore Router-ID for Some Best-Path Calculations The Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 and later allows you to avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath router-id ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. Four-Byte AS Numbers The Dell Networking OS version 7.7.1 and later supports 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs).
• AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as .. For example: AS 65546 is represented as 1.10. ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations. AS numbers less than 65536 appear in integer format (asplain); AS numbers equal to or greater than 65536 appear in the decimal format (asdot+). For example, the AS number 65526 appears as 65526 and the AS number 65546 appears as 1.10.
bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057
Router B has an inbound route-map applied on Router C to prepend "65001 65002" to the as-path, the following events take place on Router B: 1 Receive and validate the update. 2 Prepend local-as 200 to as-path. 3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B.
• To return all values on an snmpwalk for the f10BgpM2Peer sub-OID, use the -C c option, such as snmpwalk -v 2c -C c -c public. • An SNMP walk may terminate pre-maturely if the index does not increment lexicographically. Dell Networking recommends using options to ignore such errors. • Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer.
Item Default Route Flap Damping Parameters half-life = 15 minutes reuse = 750 suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes external distance = 20 Distance internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 keepalive = 60 seconds Timers holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Enabling BGP By default, BGP is not enabled on the system. The Dell Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN).
bgp four-octet-as-support NOTE: Use it only if you support 4-Byte AS numbers or if you support AS4 number representation. If you are supporting 4-Byte ASNs, enable this command. Disable 4-Byte support and return to the default 2-Byte format by using the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. You cannot disable 4-Byte support if you currently have a 4-Byte ASN configured. b Disabling 4-Byte AS numbers also disables ASDOT and ASDOT+ number representation. All AS numbers are displayed in ASPLAIN format.
10.10.21.1 10.10.32.3 65123 0 65123 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 never 0 never Active Active R2#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.10.2, local AS number 48735.
For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 0, neighbor version 0 0 accepted prefixes consume 0 bytes Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No active TCP connection Dell# R2#show running-config bgp ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.
• Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ Example of the bgp asnotation asplain Command Example of the bgp asnotation asdot Command Example of the bgp asnotation asdot+ Command Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asplain Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 remote-as 18508 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 neighbor 172.30.1.250 route-map rmap1 in neighbor 172.30.1.
CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown By default, all peer groups are disabled. 3 Create a BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor ip-address remote-as as-number 4 Enable the neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor ip-address no shutdown 5 Add an enabled neighbor to the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor ip-address peer-group peer-group-name 6 Add a neighbor as a remote AS.
NOTE: When you configure a new set of BGP policies for a peer group, always reset the peer group by entering the clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. When you create a peer group, it is disabled (shutdown). The following example shows the creation of a peer group (zanzibar) (in bold).
Configuring BGP Fast Fail-Over By default, a BGP session is governed by the hold time. BGP routers typically carry large routing tables, so frequent session resets are not desirable. The BGP fast fail-over feature reduces the convergence time while maintaining stability. The connection to a BGP peer is immediately reset if a link to a directly connected external peer fails. When you enable fail-over, BGP tracks IP reachability to the peer remote address and the peer local address.
To verify that fast fail-over is enabled on a peer-group, use the show ip bgp peer-group command (shown in bold). Dell#sh ip bgp peer-group Peer-group test fail-over enabled BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is test Number of peers in this group 1 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 100.100.100.
Maintaining Existing AS Numbers During an AS Migration The local-as feature smooths out the BGP network migration operation and allows you to maintain existing ASNs during a BGP network migration. When you complete your migration, be sure to reconfigure your routers with the new information and disable this feature. • Allow external routes from this neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {IP address | peer-group-name local-as as number [no prepend] • Peer Group Name: 16 characters.
• Number: 1 through 10. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must use Configuring Peer Groups’before assigning it to an AS. Example of Viewing AS Numbers in AS Paths The lines shown in bold are the number of times ASN 65123 can appear in the AS path (allows–in 9). To disable this feature, use the no neighbor allow-as in number command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.
• Enable graceful restart for the BGP node. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart • Set maximum restart time for all peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [restart-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart as a receiver only.
Filtering on an AS-Path Attribute You can use the BGP attribute, AS_PATH, to manipulate routing policies. The AS_PATH attribute contains a sequence of AS numbers representing the route’s path. As the route traverses an AS, the ASN is prepended to the route. You can manipulate routes based on their AS_PATH to affect interdomain routing. By identifying certain ASN in the AS_PATH, you can permit or deny routes based on the number in its AS_PATH. AS-PATH ACLs use regular expressions to search AS_PATH values.
0x59cd3b4 0x7128114 0x536a914 0x2ffe884 0x2ff7284 0x2ff7ec4 0x2ff8544 0x736c144 0x3b8d224 0x5eb1e44 0x5cd891c --More-- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 10 3 1 99 4 3 1 10 1 9 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 209 209 209 701 701 209 701 701 209 701 209 7018 15227 i 3356 13845 i 701 6347 7781 i 3561 9116 21350 i 1239 577 855 ? 3561 4755 17426 i 5743 2648 i 209 568 721 1494 i 701 2019 i 8584 16158 i 6453 4759 i Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 shutdown Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neigh 10.155.15.
• metric-type: external or internal. • map-name: name of a configured route map. Enabling Additional Paths The add-path feature is disabled by default. NOTE: Note: In some cases, while receiving 1K same routes from more than 64 iBGP neighbors, BGP sessions holdtime of 10 seconds may flap. The BGP add-path does not update packets for advertisement and cannot scale to higher numbers. Either reduce the number of routes added or increase the holddown timer value.
CONFIG-COMMUNITYLIST mode {deny | permit} {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | quote-regexp regular-expression-list | regexp regular-expression} • • • • • • community-number: use AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 Bytes or 4 Bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system. local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT.
deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny 701:20 702:20 703:20 704:20 705:20 14551:20 701:112 702:112 703:112 704:112 705:112 Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} send-community To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. If you want to remove or add a specific COMMUNITY number from a BGP path, you must create a route map with one or both of the following statements in the route map. Then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1 Enter ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
*>i 4.24.118.16/30 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.0/30 *>i 6.1.0.0/16 *>i 6.2.0.0/22 *>i 6.3.0.0/18 --More-- 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.
3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5 Apply the route map to the neighbor or peer group’s incoming or outgoing routes. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Enabling Multipath By default, the software allows one path to a destination. You can enable multipath to allow up to 16 parallel paths to a destination. To allow more than one path, use the following command. The show ip bgp network command includes multipath information for that network. • Enable multiple parallel paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number The show ip bgp network command includes multipath information for that network.
CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5 Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured prefix list. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} Configure the following parameters: • ip-address or peer-group-name: enter the neighbor’s IP address or the peer group’s name. • prefix-list-name: enter the name of a configured prefix list.
Configure the following parameters: • ip-address or peer-group-name: enter the neighbor’s IP address or the peer group’s name. • map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. • in: apply the route map to inbound routes. • out: apply the route map to outbound routes. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode.
• Assign an ID to a router reflector cluster. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp cluster-id cluster-id • You can have multiple clusters in an AS. Configure the local router as a route reflector and the neighbor or peer group identified is the route reflector client. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client When you enable a route reflector, the system automatically enables route reflection to all clients.
bgp confederation identifier as-number • • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte). Specifies which confederation sub-AS are peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp confederation peers as-number [... as-number] • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte). All Confederation routers must be either 4 Byte or 2 Byte. You cannot have a mix of router ASN support. To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode.
• suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000.) • max-suppress-time: the range is from 1 to 255. The maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value. The default is 60 minutes. • • route-map map-name: name of a configured route map.
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp dampening 2 ? <1-20000> Value to start reusing a route (default = 750) Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp dampening 2 2000 ? <1-20000> Value to start suppressing a route (default = 2000) Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp dampening 2 2000 3000 ? <1-255> Maximum duration to suppress a stable route (default = 60) Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp dampening 2 2000 3000 10 ? route-map Route-map to specify criteria for dampening To view a count of dampened routes, history routes, and penalized routes w
To view non-default values, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. Enabling BGP Neighbor Soft-Reconfiguration BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for faster and easier route changing. Changing routing policies typically requires a reset of BGP sessions (the TCP connection) for the policies to take effect.
Enabling or disabling BGP neighbors You can enable or disable all the configured BGP neighbors using the shutdown all command in ROUTER BGP mode. To disable all the configured BGP neighbors: 1 Enter the router bgp mode using the following command: CONFIGURATION Mode router bgp as-number 2 In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface.
ipv6-unicast commands. Irrespective of whether the BGP neighbors are disabled earlier, the shutdown all command brings down all the configured BGP neighbors. When you issue the no shutdown all command, all the BGP neighbor neighbors are enabled. However, when you re-enable all the BGP neighbors in global configuration mode, only the neighbors that were not in disabled state before the global shutdown come up.
When you configure a peer to support IPv4 multicast, the system takes the following actions: • Send a capability advertisement to the peer in the BGP Open message specifying IPv4 multicast as a supported AFI/SAFI (Subsequent Address Family Identifier). • If the corresponding capability is received in the peer’s Open message, BGP marks the peer as supporting the AFI/SAFI.
EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] View information about BGP updates and filter by prefix name. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out] [prefix-list name] Enable soft-reconfiguration debug. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration In-BGP is shown using the show ip protocols command. The system displays debug messages on the console.
Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known attribute Notification History 'UPDATE error/Missing well-known attr' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 PDU Counters The Dell Networking OS version 7.5.1.0 introduces additional counters for various types of PDUs sent and received from neighbors. These are seen in the output of the show ip bgp neighbor command.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) Example of Enabling BGP (Router 2) Example of Enabling BGP (Router 3) Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 1) Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 2) Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 3) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int gig 1/21 R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.
192.168.128.3 100 5 R1# 4 1 0 0 00:00:09 4 R2# conf R2(conf)#int loop 0 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.2/24 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.2/24 no shutdown R2(conf-if-lo-0)#int gig 2/11 R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#ip address 10.0.1.22/24 R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip address 10.0.1.
R3(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.3/24 R3(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int gig 3/11 R3(conf-if-gi-3/11)#ip address 10.0.3.33/24 R3(conf-if-gi-3/11)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/11)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/11 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int gig 3/21 R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.
R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 peer-group AAA R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer-group BBB R1(conf-router_bgp)# R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor BBB peer-group neighbor BBB no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 peer-group AAA neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.
Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00150306 00000000 Local host: 192.168.128.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 192.168.128.2, Foreign port: 65464 BGP neighbor is 192.168.128.3, remote AS 100, external link Member of peer-group BBB for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.128.
1 network entrie(s) using 132 bytes of memory 3 paths using 204 bytes of memory BGP-RIB over all using 207 bytes of memory 2 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 128 bytes of memory 2 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 90 bytes of memory 2 neighbor(s) using 9216 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 192.168.128.1 99 140 136 2 0 (0) 00:11:24 1 192.168.128.3 100 138 140 2 0 (0) 00:18:31 1 R2#show ip bgp neighbor BGP neighbor is 192.168.128.
85 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1,
ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 2, neighbor version 2 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) 223
11 Configuration Cloning Configuration Cloning enables you to clone the configuration from one aggregator to one or more aggregators. You can identify the source aggregator where running configuration is check-pointed, extracted and downloaded to the target aggregator for further use. The target aggregator checks the compatibilities of the cloning file based on the version, mode and optional modules.
• Failure • Cloning detailed status displays a string that gives detailed description of cloning status. When multiple error or warning messages are present, the status is separated by the ; delimiter. • Cloning status codes are useful when there are multiple warning or failure messages. Each warning or failure message is given a code number; this status can list the message codes that can be decoded when the cloning status string could not accommodate all the errors and warnings.
Cloning state (captured in command output) Cloning status (captured in command output) Applicability Warning IOM modes are changed from <> to <> to complete cloning operation. Target Warning Minor release version mismatch Target If the compatibility check passes through, the target aggregator strips the cloning header and proceeds to parsing actual configuration in the cloning-file. It goes through the configuration one by one and checks if any command or feature requires in reboot.
12 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) Content addressable memory (CAM) is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 and Layer 3 forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. Topics: • CAM Allocation • Test CAM Usage • View CAM-ACL Settings • CAM Optimization CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV4 ACLs and quality of service (QoS) regions by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: There can be only one odd number of Blocks in the CLI configuration; the other Blocks must be in factors of 2. For example, a CLI configuration of 5+4+2+1+1 Blocks is not supported; a configuration of 6+4+2+1 Blocks is supported. You must save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings to take effect. 1 Select a cam-acl action.
VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl : : : : : 0 0 0 0 2 -- Stack unit 5 -Current Settings(in block sizes) L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 2 Dell# CAM Optimization When you enable this command, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port-pipe, only a single copy of the policy i
13 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Dell Networking OS supports control plane policing (CoPP). CoPP uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The switch can process maximum of 4200 PPS (packets per second). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though Per Protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because Queue-Based Rate Limiting is applies first.
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended bgp cpu-qos Dell(conf-ip-acl-cpuqos)#permit bgp Dell(conf-ip-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#mac access-list extended lacp cpu-qos Dell(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#permit lacp Dell(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-icmp cpu-qos Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit icmp Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-vrrp cpu-qos Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#qos-policy-in rate_limit_200k cpu-qo
CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-input name cpu-qos 2 Create an input policy-map to assign the QoS policy to the desired service queues.l. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue 0 qos-policy name 3 Enter Control Plane mode. CONFIGURATION mode control-plane-cpuqos 4 Assign a CPU queue-based service policy on the control plane in cpu-qos mode. Enabling this command sets the queue rates according to those configured.
Q7 Dell# 1100 To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
14 Data Center Bridging (DCB) On an I/O Aggregator, data center bridging (DCB) features are auto-configured in standalone mode. You can display information on DCB operation by using show commands. NOTE: DCB features are not supported on an Aggregator in stacking mode.
enabled network is required in a data center. The Dell Networking switches that support a unified fabric and consolidate multiple network infrastructures use a single input/output (I/O) device called a converged network adapter (CNA). A CNA is a computer input/output device that combines the functionality of a host bus adapter (HBA) with a network interface controller (NIC). Multiple adapters on different devices for several traffic types are no longer required.
• PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only two lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) storage traffic. Configure the same lossless queues on all ports.
Figure 28. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 11. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Priority group A group of 802.1p priorities used for bandwidth allocation and queue scheduling. All 802.1p priority traffic in a group must have the same traffic handling requirements for latency and frame loss. Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group.
Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx) The data center bridging exchange (DCBx) protocol is disabled by default on any switch on which PFC or ETS are enabled. DCBx allows a switch to automatically discover DCB-enabled peers and exchange configuration information. PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange and negotiate parameters with peer devices. DCBx capabilities include: • Discovery of DCB capabilities on peer-device connections. • Determination of possible mismatch in DCB configuration on a peer link.
Applying a DCB Map on Server-Facing Ethernet Ports You can apply a DCB map only on a physical Ethernet interface and can apply only one DCB map per interface. 1 Enter Interface Configuration mode on a server-facing port to apply a DCB map. CONFIGURATION mode interface tengigabitEthernet slot/port 2 Apply the DCB map on an Ethernet port. Repeat this step to apply a DCB map to more than one port.
Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 29. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Data Center Bridging: Auto-DCB-Enable Mode On an Aggregator in standalone or VLT modes, the default mode of operation for data center bridging on Ethernet ports is auto-DCBenable mode.
show interfaces Command Example: DCB disabled and Flow Control enabled Dell#show running-config interface te 0/4 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport auto vlan flowcontrol rx on tx off dcb-map DCB_MAP_PFC_OFF ! protocol lldp advertise management-tlv management-address system-name dcbx port-role auto-downstream no shutdown Dell# When DCB is Enabled When an interface receives a DCBx protocol packet, it automatically enables DCB and disables link-level flow control.
1 Globally enable auto-detection of DCBx and auto-enabling of DCB on all interfaces after switch reload. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable auto-detect on-next-reload Enabling DCB To configure the Aggregator so that all interfaces are DCB enabled and flow control disabled, use the dcb enable command. Disabling DCB To configure the Aggregator so that all interfaces are DCB disabled and flow control enabled, use the no dcb enable command.
DCB-MAP mode exit 5 Enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 6 Apply the dcb-map with PFC and ETS configurations to both ingress and egress interfaces. INTERFACE mode dcb-map map-name 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 on all PFC and ETS enabled interfaces to ensure lossless traffic service. NOTE: All these configurations are available only in PMUX mode and you cannot perform these configurations in Standalone mode.
How Priority-Based Flow Control is Implemented Priority-based flow control provides a flow control mechanism based on the 802.1p priorities in converged Ethernet traffic received on an interface and is enabled by default. As an enhancement to the existing Ethernet pause mechanism, PFC stops traffic transmission for specified priorities (CoS values) without impacting other priority classes. Different traffic types are assigned to different priority classes.
The configuration of no-drop queues provides flexibility for ports on which PFC is not needed but lossless traffic should egress from the interface. Lossless traffic egresses out the no-drop queues. Ingress dot1p traffic from PFC-enabled interfaces is automatically mapped to the no-drop egress queues. 1 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 2 Configure the port queues that still functions as no-drop queues for lossless traffic.
Valid stack-unit IDs are 0 to 5. The only valid port-set ID (port-pipe number) is 0. Dell Networking OS Behavior: To achieve lossless PFC operation, the PFC port count and queue number used for the reserved buffer size that is created must be greater than or equal to the buffer size required for PFC-enabled ports and lossless queues on the switch. For the PFC buffer configuration to take effect, you must reload the stack or a specified stack unit (use the reload command at EXEC Privilege level).
• A priority group consists of 802.1p priority values that are grouped together for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling, and that share the same latency and loss requirements. All 802.1p priorities mapped to the same queue should be in the same priority group. • • • By default: • All 802.1p priorities are grouped in priority group 0. • 100% of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0. The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13%.
• Strict-priority groups: If priority group 1 or 2 has free bandwidth, (20 + 30)% of the free bandwidth is distributed to priority group 3. Priority groups 1 and 2 retain whatever free bandwidth remains up to the (20+ 30)%. If two priority groups have strict-priority scheduling, traffic assigned from the priority group with the higher priority-queue number is scheduled first.
• If the received peer configuration is not compatible with the currently configured port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer port is disabled and a syslog message for an incompatible configuration is generated. The network administrator must then reconfigure the peer device so that it advertises a compatible DCB configuration. The configuration received from a DCBx peer or from an internally propagated configuration is not stored in the switch’s running configuration.
• Priority-based flow control (PFC) DCBx uses the following methods to exchange DCB configuration parameters: Asymmetric DCB parameters are exchanged between a DCBx-enabled port and a peer port without requiring that a peer port and the local port use the same configured values for the configurations to be compatible. For example, ETS uses an asymmetric exchange of parameters between DCBx peers.
Auto-Detection of the DCBx Version The Aggregator operates in auto-detection mode so that a DCBx port automatically detects the DCBx version on a peer port. Legacy CIN and CEE versions are supported in addition to the standard IEEE version 2.5 DCBx. A DCBx port detects a peer version after receiving a valid frame for that version. The local DCBx port reconfigures to operate with the peer version and maintains the peer version on the link until one of the following conditions occurs: • The switch reboots.
Figure 30. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: • DCBx requires LLDP in both send (TX) and receive (RX) modes to be enabled on a port interface. If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
DCBx Error Messages The following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs. LLDP_MULTIPLE_PEER_DETECTED: DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting more than one DCBx peer on the port interface. LLDP_PEER_AGE_OUT: DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx peer interface. DSM_DCBx_PEER_VERSION_CONFLICT: A local port expected to receive the IEEE, CIN, or CEE version in a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different, conflicting DCBx version.
Command Output show interface port-type slot/port pfc {summary Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an | detail} interface, including priorities and link delay. To clear PFC TLV counters, use the clear pfc counters {stack-unit unit-number | tengigabitethernet slot/port} command. show interface port-type slot/port ets {summary Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an | detail} interface, including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation.
Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/4 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is recommended PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quanta Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCS
Fields Description State Machine Type Type of state machine used for DCBx exchanges of PFC parameters: • • Feature: for legacy DCBx versions Symmetric: for an IEEE version TLV Tx Status Status of PFC TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. PFC Link Delay Link delay (in quanta) used to pause specified priority traffic. Application Priority TLV: FCOE TLV Tx Status Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from local DCBx port: enabled or disabled.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 13% 13% 13% 13% 12% 12% 12% 12% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Reco TLV Pkts, 0 Output Reco TLV Pkts, 0 Error Reco TLV Pkts The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 14.
Field Description State Machine Type Type of state machine used for DCBx exchanges of ETS parameters: • • Feature: for legacy DCBx versions Asymmetric: for an IEEE version Conf TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. Reco TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Recommendation TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled.
Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Example of the show interface DCBx detail Command Dell# show interface tengigabitethernet 0/4 dcbx detail Dell#show interface te 0/4 dcbx detail E-ETS Configuration TLV enabled e-ETS Configuration TLV disabled R-ETS Recommendation TLV enabled r-ETS Recommendation TLV disabled P-PFC Configuration TLV enabled p-PFC Configuration TLV disa
Table 15. show interface DCBx detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with chassis slot and port number. Port-Role Configured DCBx port role: auto-upstream or auto-downstream. DCBx Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration. The DCBx operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status.
Field Description PG TLV Statistics: Input PG TLV Pkts Number of PG TLVs received. PG TLV Statistics: Output PG TLV Pkts Number of PG TLVs transmitted. PG TLV Statistics: Error PG TLV Pkts Number of PG error packets received. Application Priority TLV Statistics: Input Appln Priority TLV pkts Number of Application TLVs received. Application Priority TLV Statistics: Output Appln Priority TLV pkts Number of Application TLVs transmitted.
• PFC DCBx Oper status: Down • ETS DCBx Oper status: Down • DCBx Oper status: Disabled. Reason Description Port Shutdown Port is shut down. All other reasons for DCBx inoperation, if any, are ignored. LLDP Rx/Tx is disabled LLDP is disabled (Admin Mode set to rx or tx only) globally or on the interface. Waiting for Peer Waiting for peer or detected peer connection has aged out. Multiple Peer Detected Multiple peer connections detected on the interface.
Reason 266 Description • Incompatible priority group ID (PGID). • Incompatible bandwidth (BW) allocation. • Incompatible TSA. • Incompatible TC BW. • Incompatible TC TSA.
15 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) The Aggregator is auto-configured to operate as a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) client. The DHCP server, DHCP relay agent, and secure DHCP features are not supported. The DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
3 The client broadcasts a DHCPREQUEST message in response to the offer, requesting the offered values. 4 After receiving a DHCPREQUEST, the server binds the clients’ unique identifier (the hardware address plus IP address) to the accepted configuration parameters and stores the data in a database called a binding table. The server then broadcasts a DHCPACK message, which signals to the client that it may begin using the assigned parameters.
Dell Networking OS Behavior: DHCP is implemented in Dell Networking OS based on RFC 2131 and 3046. Debugging DHCP Client Operation To enable debug messages for DHCP client operation, enter the following debug commands: • Enable the display of log messages for all DHCP packets sent and received on DHCP client interfaces.
Dell#1w2d23h: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %DHCLIENT-5-DHCLIENT-LOG: DHCLIENT_DBG_EVT: Interface Ma 0/0 :DHCP RELEASE CMD Received in state BOUND 1w2d23h: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %DHCLIENT-5-DHCLIENT-LOG: DHCLIENT_DBG_PKT: DHCP RELEASE sent in Interface Ma 0/0 1w2d23h: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %DHCLIENT-5-DHCLIENT-LOG: DHCLIENT_DBG_EVT: Interface Ma 0/0 :Transitioned to state STOPPED 1w2d23h: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %DHCLIENT-5-DHCLIENT-LOG: DHCLIENT_DBG_EVT: Interface Ma 0/0 :DHCP IP RELEASED CMD sent to FTOS in state STOPPED Dell# renew dhcp int
You can override the DHCP-assigned address on the OOB management interface by manually configuring an IP address using the CLI or CMC interface. If no user-configured IP address exists for the OOB interface exists and if the OOB IP address is not in the startup configuration, the Aggregator will automatically obtain it using DHCP. You can also manually configure an IP address for the VLAN 1 default management interface using the CLI.
NOTE: Management routes added by the DHCP client include the specific routes to reach a DHCP server in a different subnet and the management route. DHCP Client on a VLAN The following conditions apply on a VLAN that operates as a DHCP client: • • The default VLAN 1 with all ports auto-configured as members is the only L3 interface on the Aggregator.
Option Number and Description DHCP Message Type Option 53 • 1: DHCPDISCOVER • 2: DHCPOFFER • 3: DHCPREQUEST • 4: DHCPDECLINE • 5: DHCPACK • 6: DHCPNACK • 7: DHCPRELEASE • 8: DHCPINFORM Parameter Request List Option 55 Renewal Time Option 58 Clients use this option to tell the server which parameters it requires. It is a series of octets where each octet is DHCP option code.
• Insert Option 82 into DHCP packets. CONFIGURATION mode int ma 0/0 ip add dhcp relay information-option remote-id For routers between the relay agent and the DHCP server, enter the trust-downstream option. Releasing and Renewing DHCP-based IP Addresses On an Aggregator configured as a DHCP client, you can release a dynamically-assigned IP address without removing the DHCP client operation on the interface. To manually acquire a new IP address from the DHCP server, use the following command.
Example of the show ip dhcp lease Command Dell# show ip dhcp Interface Lease-IP Def-Router ServerId State Lease Obtnd At Lease Expires At ========= ======== ========= ======== ===== ============== ================ Ma 0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 INIT -----NA--------NA---Vl 1 10.1.1.254/24 0.0.0.0 Renew Time ========== ----NA---08-26-2011 16:21:50 10.1.1.
16 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Dell Networking OS supports equal cost multi-path (ECMP). ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity Dell Networking OS supports ECMP for flow-based affinity. NOTE: IPv6 /128 routes having multiple paths do not form ECMPs. The /128 route is treated as a host entry and finds its place in the host table. NOTE: Using XOR algorithms results in imbalanced loads across an ECMP/LAG when the number of members in said ECMP/LAG is a multiple of 4.
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indexes are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. To enable the link bundle monitoring feature, for link bundle monitoring with ECMP, use the ecmp-group command. You can configure the ecmp-group with id 2, enabled for link bundle monitoring.
17 FC FPORT Dell Networking OS supports FC FPort on Combo port card.
FC FPORT FC FPort can be configured on ports 9 and 10 of Combo port card in Dell FX2 chassis. Configuring Switch Mode to FCF Port Mode To configure switch mode to Fabric services, use the following commands. 1 Configure Switch mode to FCF Port. CONFIGURATION mode feature fc fport domain id 2 NOTE: Enable remote-fault-signaling rx off command in FCF FPort mode on interfaces connected to the Compellent and MDF storage devices.
fcoe-map map-name 3 Configure the association between the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE traffic between servers and a SAN, and the fabric where the desired storage arrays are installed. FCOE MAP mode fabric-id fabric-num vlan vlan-id 4 Configure the FCoE mapped address prefix (FC-MAP) value which is used to identify FCoE traffic transmitted on the FCoE VLAN for the specified fabric.
FCoE Maps To identify the SAN fabric to which FCoE storage traffic is sent, use an FCoE map. Using an FCoE map, an NPG operates as an FCoE-FC bridge between an FC SAN and FCoE network by providing FCoE-enabled servers and switches with the necessary parameters to log in to a SAN fabric. An FCoE map applies the following parameters on server-facing Ethernet and fabric-facing FC ports: • • • • • The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic.
For example: fabric id 10 vlan 10 3 Add a text description of the settings in the FCoE map. FCoE MAP mode description text The maximum is 32 characters. 4 Specify the FC-MAP value used to generate a fabric-provided MAC address, which is required to send FCoE traffic from a server on the FCoE VLAN to the FC fabric specified in Step 2. FCoE MAP mode fc-map fc-map-value You must enter a unique MAC address prefix as the FC-MAP value for each fabric. The range is from 0EFC00 to 0EFCFF. The default is none.
• FC-ID: Switch assigned 24-bit device FC address. • Alias: User-defined name of a zone member. NOTE: Dell Networking OS does not support using WWNN or Domain/Port as members of a zone. Creating Zone and Adding Members To create a zone and add members to the zone, use the following commands. 1 Create a zone. CONFIGURATION mode fc zone zonename 2 Add members to a zone. ZONE CONFIGURATION mode member word The member can be WWPN (00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00), port ID (000000), or alias name (word).
fc zoneset zoneset_name 2 Add zones into a zoneset. ZONESET CONFIGURATION mode member zonename Example of Creating Zonesets Dell(conf)#fc zoneset zs1 Dell(conf-fc-zoneset-zs1)#member z1 Dell(conf-fc-zoneset-zs1)# Dell(conf-fc-zoneset-zs1)#exit Dell(conf-fc-zoneset-zs1)# Activating a Zoneset Activating a zoneset makes the zones within it effective. On a switch, only one zoneset can be active. Any changes in an activated zoneset do not take effect until it is re-activated.
Command Description show fc switch Displays the FC Switch mode and world wide name.
Fc 0/9 1 Dell# 01:35:00 10:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 20:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 Example of the show fc zoneset Command Dell#show fc zoneset ZoneSetName ZoneName ZoneMember ======================================== fcoe_srv_fc_tgt brcd_sanb brcd_cna1_wwpn1 sanb_p2tgt1_wwpn Active Zoneset: fcoe_srv_fc_tgt ZoneName ZoneMember ======================================== brcd_sanb 10:00:8c:7c:ff:21:5f:8d 20:02:00:11:0d:03:00:00 Dell# Example of the show fc zoneset active Command Dell#show fc zoneset active Active Zoneset:
18 FCoE Transit Dell Networking OS supports the Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FCoE transit is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces.
• Allow transit Ethernet bridges to efficiently monitor FIP frames passing between FCoE end-devices and an FCF. To dynamically configure ACLs on the bridge to only permit traffic authorized by the FCF, use the FIP snooping data. FIP enables FCoE devices to discover one another, initialize and maintain virtual links over an Ethernet network, and access storage devices in a storage area network (SAN).
Figure 33. FIP Discovery and Login Between an ENode and an FCF FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB).
Figure 34. FIP Snooping on an FN IOM Switch The following sections describe how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch that functions as a FIP snooping bridge so that it can perform the following functions: • Perform FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • To assign a MAC address to an FCoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in, set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value an FCF uses.
• A switch stack configuration is synchronized with the standby stack unit. • Dynamic population of the FCoE database (ENode, Session, and FCF tables) is synchronized with the standby stack unit. The FCoE database is maintained by snooping FIP keep-alive messages. • In case of a failover, the new master switch starts the required timers for the FCoE database tables. Timers run only on the master stack unit.
Enable FIP Snooping on VLANs You can enable FIP snooping globally on a switch on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. When you enable FIP snooping on VLANs: • FIP frames are allowed to pass through the switch on the enabled VLANs and are processed to generate FIP snooping ACLs. • FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual-link initialization (fabric login FLOGI) between an ENode and an FCF. All other FCoE traffic is dropped.
Table 17. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on server-facing ports in ENode mode. MTU auto-configuration MTU size is set to mini-jumbo (2500 bytes) when a port is in Switchport mode, the FIP snooping feature is enabled on the switch, and FIP snooping is enabled on all or individual VLANs.
Configuring FIP Snooping You can enable FIP snooping globally on all FCoE VLANs on a switch or on an individual FCoE VLAN. By default, FIP snooping is disabled. To enable FCoE transit on the switch and configure the FCoE transit parameters on ports, follow these steps. 1 Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. CONFIGURATION mode. feature fip-snooping 2 Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode or VLAN INTERFACE mode.
Command Output and FCoE session ID number (FC-ID), worldwide node name (WWNN) and the worldwide port name (WWPN). show fip-snooping config Displays the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. show fip-snooping enode [enode-mac-address] Displays information on the ENodes in FIP-snooped sessions, including the ENode interface and MAC address, FCF MAC address, VLAN ID and FC-ID.
Field Description FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session assigned by the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel ID assigned by the FCF. Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA port. Port WWNN Worldwide node name of the CNA port.
Field Description ENode Interface Slot/number of the interface connected to the ENode. FKA_ADV_PERIOD Period of time (in milliseconds) during which FIP keep-alive advertisements are transmitted. No of ENodes Number of ENodes connected to the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF.
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of FLOGO Enode Keep Alive VN Port Keep Alive Multicast Discovery Advertisement Unicast Discovery Advertisement FLOGI Accepts FLOGI Rejects FDISC Accepts FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 :0 :0 :4451 :2 :2 :0 :16 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 The following table descr
Field Description Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts Number of FCF discovery timeouts that occurred on the interface. Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of VN port session timeouts that occurred on the interface. Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Number of session failures due to hardware configuration that occurred on the interface.
Figure 35. FIP Snooping on an FN IOMSwitch Configuration Example • A server-facing port is configured for DCBx in an auto-downstream role. • An FCF-facing port is configured for DCBx in an auto-upstream or configuration-source role. The DCBx configuration on the FCF-facing port is detected by the server-facing port and the DCB PFC configuration on both ports is synchronized. For more information about how to configure DCBx and PFC on a port, refer to the Data Center Bridging (DCB) chapter.
NOTE: Configuring an FC-MAP value is only required if you do not use the default FC-MAP value (0x0EFC00). Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)# portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)# switchport NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
19 FIPS Cryptography Dell Networking OS supports federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell Networking platforms. This feature provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce.
NOTE: Under certain unusual circumstances, it is possible for the fips enable command to indicate a failure. • This failure occurs if any of the self-tests fail when you enable FIPS mode. • This failure occurs if there were existing SSH/Telnet sessions that could not be closed successfully in a reasonable amount of time.
Dell Version Jumbo Capable POE Capable FIPS Mode Burned In MAC No Of MACs ... : : : : : : XML-8-3-7-1061 yes no enabled 00:01:e8:8a:ff:0c 3 Disabling FIPS Mode The following describes disabling FIPS mode. When you disable FIPS mode, the following changes occur: • The SSH server disables. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, close. • Any existing host keys (both RSA and RSA1) are deleted from system memory and NVRAM storage. • FIPS mode disables.
20 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Figure 36. Normal Operating FRRP Topology A virtual LAN (VLAN) is configured on all node ports in the ring. All ring ports must be members of the Member VLAN and the Control VLAN. The Member VLAN is the VLAN used to transmit data as described earlier. The Control VLAN is used to perform the health checks on the ring. The Control VLAN can always pass through all ports in the ring, including the secondary port of the Master node.
Ring Failure If a Transit node detects a link down on any of its ports on the FRRP ring, it immediately sends a link-down control frame on the Control VLAN to the Master node. When the Master node receives this control frame, the Master node moves from the Normal state to the Ring-Fault state and unblocks its Secondary port. The Master node clears its routing table and sends a control frame to all other ring nodes, instructing them to clear their routing tables as well.
Figure 37. Multiple Rings Connected by a Single Switch Example Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. • The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. • You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
• Hello RHF: sent at 500ms (hello interval); Only the Master node transmits and processes these. • Topology Change RHF: triggered updates; processed at all nodes. Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent.
Implementing FRRP • FRRP is media and speed independent. • FRRP is a Dell proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor. • You must disable the spanning tree protocol (STP) on both the Primary and Secondary interfaces before you can enable FRRP. • All ring ports must be Layer 2 ports. This is required for both Master and Transit nodes. • A VLAN configured as a control VLAN for a ring cannot be configured as a control or member VLAN for any other ring.
• All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports. • All ports on the ring must use the same VLAN ID for the control VLAN. • You cannot configure a VLAN as both a control VLAN and member VLAN on the same ring. • Only two interfaces can be members of a control VLAN (the Master Primary and Secondary ports). • Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes.
no disable Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • • • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
6 Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode. timer {hello-interval|dead-interval} milliseconds • Hello-Interval: the range is from 50 to 2000, in increments of 50 (default is 500).
• Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. • Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. • There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. • You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only.
Example of R1 MASTER Example of R2 TRANSIT Example of R3 TRANSIT interface GigabitEthernet 1/24 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/34 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/24,34 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/24,34 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEthernet 1/24 secondary GigabitEthernet 1/34 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode master no disable interfa
no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/14,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/14,21 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEthernet 3/21 secondary GigabitEthernet 3/14 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable FRRP Support on VLT Using FRRP rings, you can inter-connect VLT domains across data centers.
NOTE: For more information on how to configure FRRP, see FRRP Configuration NOTE: For more information on configuring VLT between 2 devices, see Configuring VLT Example Scenario Following example scenario describes an Active-Active FRRP ring topology where the ring is blocked on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis allowing active-active FRRP ring for different set of VLANs. In this scenario, an FRRP ring named R1 is configured with VLT Node1 acting as the Master node and VLT Node2 as the transit node.
Figure 40. FRRP Ring using VLTi links Important Points to Remember • VLTi can be configured only as the primary interface for the primary interface of any FRRP ring. • Only RSTP and PVST are supported in the VLT environment. Enabling either RSTP or PVST effects FRRP functionality even though these features are disabled on FRRP enabled interfaces. • Dell Networking OS does not support coexistence of xSTP and FRRP configurations.
21 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) Dell Networking OS supports GARP VLAN registration protocol (GVRP). Typical virtual local area network (VLAN) implementation involves manually configuring each Layer 2 switch that participates in a given VLAN. GVRP, defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
type of port is referred to as a VLAN trunk port, but it is not necessary to specifically identify to the Dell Networking operating system (OS) that the port is a trunk port. Figure 41. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1 Enabling GVRP Globally 2 Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface Related Configuration Tasks • Configure GVRP Registration • Configure a GARP Timer Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command.
Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. • Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 no ip address switchport gvrp enable gvrp registration fixed 34-35 gvrp registration forbidden 45-46 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-1/21)# Configure a GARP Timer Set GARP timers to the same values on all devices that are exchanging information using GVRP. There are three GARP timer settings. • Join — A GARP device reliably transmits Join messages to other devices by sending each Join message two times.
22 FIP Snooping This chapter describes about the FIP snooping concepts and configuration procedures.
FIP enables FCoE devices to discover one another, initialize and maintain virtual links over an Ethernet network, and access storage devices in a storage area network. FIP satisfies the Fibre Channel requirement for point-to-point connections by creating a unique virtual link for each connection between an FCoE end-device and an FCF via a transit switch. FIP provides a functionality for discovering and logging in to an FCF.
FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB). On a FIP snooping bridge, ACLs are created dynamically as FIP login frames are processed.
Figure 43. FIP Snooping on an Aggregator The following sections describes how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch that functions as a FIP snooping bridge so that it can perform the following functions: • Performs FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • Set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value used by an FCF to assign a MAC address to an ECoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in.
• FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual-link initialization (fabric login FLOGI) between an ENode and an FCF. All other FCoE traffic is dropped. • Atleast one interface is auto-configured for FCF (FIP snooping bridge — FCF) mode on a FIP snooping-enabled VLAN. Multiple FCF trusted interfaces are auto-configured in a VLAN. • A maximum of eight VLANs are supported for FIP snooping on an Aggregator.
FIP Snooping Restrictions The following restrictions apply to FIP snooping on an Aggregator: • The maximum number of FCoE VLANs supported on the Aggregator is eight. • The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32. To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64, use the fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac command. This is configurable only in PMUX mode.
. Displaying FIP Snooping Information Use the show commands from the table below, to display information on FIP snooping. Command Output show fipsnooping sessions [interface vlan vlan-id] Displays information on FIP-snooped sessions on all VLANs or a specified VLAN, including the ENode interface and MAC address, the FCF interface and MAC address, VLAN ID, FCoE MAC address and FCoE session ID number (FC-ID), worldwide node name (WWNN) and the worldwide port name (WWPN).
Command Output show fipsnooping system Display information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch (enabled or disabled), including the number of FCoE VLANs, FCFs, ENodes, and currently active sessions. show fipsnooping vlan Display information on the FCoE VLANs on which FIP snooping is enabled.
Field Description VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. show fip-snooping fcf Command Example Dell# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface ------------------54:7f:ee:37:34:40 Po 22 2 VLAN ---100 FC-MAP -----0e:fc:00 FKA_ADV_PERIOD -------------4000 No. of Enodes ------------- show fip-snooping fcf Command Description Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF.
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of Unicast Discovery Advertisement FLOGI Accepts FLOGI Rejects FDISC Accepts FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 show fip-snooping statistics (port channel) Command Example Dell# show fip-snooping statistics interface port-channel 22 Number of Vlan Requests :0 Number of
Field Description Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FIP FDISC accept frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FIP FDISC reject frames received on the interface.
FIP Snooping Example The following figure shows an Aggregator used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 44. FIP Snooping on an Aggregator In tbe above figure, DCBX and PFC are enabled on the Aggregator (FIP snooping bridge) and on the FCF ToR switch. On the FIP snooping bridge, DCBX is configured as follows: • A server-facing port is configured for DCBX in an auto-downstream role.
• ifm enables debugging only for IFM events. • info enables debugging only for information events. • ipc enables debugging only for IPC events. • rx enables debugging only for incoming packet traffic. EXEC PRIVILEGE mode debug fip-snooping [all | acl | error | ifm | info | ipc | rx] To turn off debugging event messages, enter the no debug fip-snooping command.
23 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) On an Aggregator, IGMP snooping is auto-configured. You can display information on IGMP by using show ip igmp command. Multicast is based on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address. Hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. The internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group.
Figure 45. IGMP Version 2 Packet Format Joining a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier, or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. • • Responding to an IGMP Query. • One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet.
To accommodate these protocol enhancements, the IGMP version 3 packet structure is different from version 2. Queries (shown below in query packet format) are still sent to the all-systems address 224.0.0.1, but reports (shown below in report packet format) are sent to all the IGMP version 3 — capable multicast routers address 224.0.0.22. Figure 46. IGMP version 3 Membership Query Packet Format Figure 47.
Figure 48. IGMP Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The below illustration shows how multicast routers track and refreshes the state change in response to group-and-specific and general queries. • Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
IGMP Snooping IGMP snooping is auto-configured on an Aggregator. Multicast packets are addressed with multicast MAC addresses, which represents a group of devices rather than one unique device. Switches forward multicast frames out of all ports in a VLAN by default, even if there are only a small number of interested hosts, resulting in a waste of bandwidth.
Command Output show ip igmp snooping interface [interface] Displays IGMP information on IGMP-enabled interfaces. show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-number] Displays information on IGMP-enabled multicast router (mrouter) interfaces. clear ip igmp snooping groups [groupaddress | interface] Clears IGMP information for group addresses and IGMP-enabled interfaces.
Vlan 3 is up, line protocol is down Inbound IGMP access group is not set Interface IGMP group join rate limit is not set IGMP snooping is enabled on interface IGMP Snooping query interval is 60 seconds IGMP Snooping querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP Snooping last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP snooping fast-leave is disabled on this interface IGMP snooping querier is disabled on this interface --More-show ip igmp snooping mrouter Command Example Dell# show ip igmp snooping mrouter Interfac
24 Interfaces This chapter describes 100/1000/10000 Mbps Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with the Dell Networking operating software (OS).
• Loopback Interfaces • Null Interfaces • VLAN Membership • Port Channel Interfaces • Load Balancing through Port Channels • Changing the Hash Algorithm • Server Ports • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports • Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics • Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port • Layer 2 Flow Control Using Ethernet Pause Frames • Configure MTU Size on
If you configured a port channel interface, this command lists the interfaces configured in the port channel. NOTE: To end output from the system, such as the output from the show interfaces command, enter CTRL+C and the system returns to the command prompt. NOTE: The CLI output may be incorrectly displayed as 0 (zero) for the Rx/Tx power values. To obtain the correct power information, perform a simple network management protocol (SNMP) query.
GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet 1/0 1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 1/5 1/6 1/7 1/8 unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned 10.10.10.
show config Dell(conf-if-te-1/5)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 no ip address shutdown All the applied configurations are removed and the interface is set to the factory default state. Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface slot/port command. 1 Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information.
• Clearing Interface Counters Overview of Layer Modes On all systems running the Dell Networking OS, you can place physical interfaces, port channels, and VLANs in Layer 2 mode or Layer 3 mode. By default, VLANs are in Layer 2 mode. Table 24.
INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport For information about enabling and configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol, refer to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode.
• Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx). Add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. Example of the show ip interface Command You can only configure one primary IP address per interface.
Configuring Management Interfaces on the Switch On the Switch IO Module, the dedicated management interface provides management access to the system. You can configure this interface with the Dell Networking OS, but the configuration options on this interface are limited. You cannot configure Gateway addresses and IP addresses if it appears in the main routing table of the Dell Networking OS. In addition, proxy ARP is not supported on this interface.
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.
To configure, view, or delete a Loopback interface, use the following commands. • Enter a number as the Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback number • The range is from 0 to 16383. View Loopback interface configurations. EXEC mode show interface loopback number • Delete a Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode no interface loopback number Many of the same commands found in the physical interface are also found in the Loopback interfaces.
Table 25. VLAN Defaults Feature Default Mode Layer 2 (no IP address is assigned) Default VLAN ID VLAN 1 Default VLAN When an Aggregator boots up, all interfaces are up in Layer 2 mode and placed in the default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the default VLAN. By default, VLAN 1 is the default VLAN. To change the default VLAN ID, use the default vlan-id <1–4094> command in CONFIGURATION mode. You cannot delete the default VLAN.
Information contained in the tag header allows the system to prioritize traffic and to forward information to ports associated with a specific VLAN ID. Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can belong only to one VLAN. Configuring VLAN Membership By default, all Aggregator ports are member of all (4094) VLANs, including the default untagged VLAN 1.
NOTE: A VLAN is active only if the VLAN contains interfaces and those interfaces are operationally up. In the above example, VLAN 1 is inactive because it does not contain any interfaces. The other VLANs listed contain enabled interfaces and are active. In a VLAN, the shutdown command stops Layer 3 (routed) traffic only. Layer 2 traffic continues to pass through the VLAN. If the VLAN is not a routed VLAN (that is, configured with an IP address), the shutdown command has no affect on VLAN traffic.
VLAN Configuration on Physical Ports and Port-Channels Unlike other Dell Networking OS platforms, IOA allows VLAN configurations on port and port-channel levels. This allows you to assign VLANs to a port/port-channel. NOTE: In PMUX mode, in order to avoid loops, only disjoint VLANs are allowed between the uplink ports/uplink LAGs and uplinkto-uplink switching is disabled. 1 Initialize the port with configurations such as admin up, portmode, and switchport.
i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged * 1 10 NUM Status Active Active 11 12 Active Active 13 Active 14 Active 15 Active 20 Active Description Dell# Q Ports U Te 0/3 T Po128(Te 0/4-5) T Te 0/1 T Po128(Te 0/4-5) T Po128(Te 0/4-5) T Te 0/1 T Po128(Te 0/4-5) T Te 0/1 T Po128(Te 0/4-5) T Te 0/1 T Po128(Te 0/4-5) T Te 0/1 U Po128(Te 0/4-5) U Te 0/1 You can remove the inactive VLANs that have no member ports using the following command: Dell#configure Dell(co
With this feature, you can create larger-capacity interfaces by utilizing a group of lower-speed links. For example, you can build a 40-Gigabit interface by aggregating four 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces together. If one of the five interfaces fails, traffic is redistributed across the three remaining interfaces. Port Channel Implementation The Dell Networking OS supports static and dynamic port channels. • Static — Port channels that are statically configured.
Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces To configure a port channel (LAG), use the commands similar to those found in physical interfaces. By default, no port channels are configured in the startup configuration.
To view the interface’s configuration, enter INTERFACE mode for that interface and use the show config command or from EXEC Privilege mode, use the show running-config interface interface command. To add a physical interface to a port, use the following commands. 1 Add the interface to a port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface The interface variable is the physical interface type and slot/port information. 2 Double check that the interface was added to the port channel.
When more than one interface is added to a Layer 2-port channel, the system selects one of the active interfaces in the port channel to be the primary port. The primary port replies to flooding and sends protocol data units (PDUs). An asterisk in the show interfaces port-channel brief command indicates the primary port. As soon as a physical interface is added to a port channel, the properties of the port channel determine the properties of the physical interface.
shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-5)# Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status to consider the port channel to be in “oper up” status. To set the “oper up” status of your links, use the following command. • Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. INTERFACE mode minimum-links number The default is 1.
Assigning an IP Address to a Port Channel You can assign an IP address to a port channel and use port channels in Layer 3 routing protocols. To assign an IP address, use the following command. • Configure an IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] • ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). • secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address.
xor4 | xor8 | xor16}[[hg {crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16}]| [lag {crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16 }] [stack-unit|linecard number | port-set number | [hg—seed seed-value | seedseed-value • For more information about algorithm choices, refer to the command details in the IP Routing chapter of the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
NOTE: This feature does not impact BMP mode. It always applies when reloading in Normal mode. Important Points to Remember • On a new switch running the Dell Networking OS version 9.2(0.0), with no saved startup configuration, the switch comes up with all server ports as switch ports in No Shut state. When you configure STP, the switch brings up the uplink and saves the running configuration to the startup-config file.
Bulk Configuration Examples Use the interface range command for bulk configuration. • Create a Single-Range • Create a Multiple-Range • Exclude Duplicate Entries • Exclude a Smaller Port Range • Overlap Port Ranges • Commas • Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
Overlap Port Ranges The following is an example showing how the interface-range prompt extends a port range from the smallest start port number to the largest end port number when port ranges overlap. handles overlapping port ranges.
CONFIGURATION mode interface range macro name Example of Using a Macro to Change the Interface Range Configuration Mode The following example shows how to change to the interface-range configuration mode using the interface-range macro named “test.” Dell(config)# interface range macro test Dell(config-if)# Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Monitor interface statistics with the monitor interface command.
Input IP checksum: Input overrun: Output underruns: Output throttles: m l T q - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit pps pps pps pps 0 0 0 0 c - Clear screen a - Page down t - Decrease refresh interval Dell Maintenance Using TDR The time domain reflectometer (TDR) is supported on all Dell Networking switch/routers. TDR is an assistance tool to resolve link issues that helps detect obvious open or short conditions within any of the four copper pairs.
stack-unit port number portmode quad • stack-unit: Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. The range is from 0 to 5. • port : Enter the port number of the 40G port to be split. The valid values on base module: 33 or 37; OPTM SLOT 0: 41 or 45; OPTM SLOT 1: 49 or 53. portmode quad: Identifies the uplink port as a split 10GbE SFP+ port. • • To display the stack-unit number, enter the show system brief command. Save the configuration and reload the switch.
The following table lists the various Layer 2 overheads found in the Dell Networking OS and the number of bytes. Table 26. Layer 2 Overhead Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 594-12000 = link MTU 576-11982 = IP MTU Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics You can set the wavelength for tunable 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics using the wavelength command. To set the wavelength, follow these steps: • Enter the interface mode and set the wavelength. INTERFACE mode wavelength 1529.
NOTE: You can use the QSA adaptor to establish connectivity between a high-density 100 Gigabit platform and a relatively lower-end 1 Gigabit switch or a server. The QSA acts as an interface between the QSFP28 ports (that support 100 Gigabit speeds) and SPF optics with a maximum speed of 1 Gigabit per second. Depending on the type of optics you plug into the QSA connected to a 100 Gigabit port, the system automatically detects the supported speed of the optics and sets the interface speed accordingly.
The following error message appears when trying to enable flow control when you already configured half duplex: Can’t configure flowcontrol when half duplex is configure, config ignored. The following error message appears when trying to enable half duplex and flow control configuration is on: Can’t configure half duplex when flowcontrol is on, config ignored. Enabling Pause Frames Enable Ethernet pause frames flow control on all ports on a chassis. If not, the system may exhibit unpredictable behavior.
Table 27. Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU Layer 2 Overhead Difference Between Link MTU and IP MTU Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. Port Channels: • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
Setting the Speed and Duplex Mode of Ethernet Interfaces To discover whether the remote and local interface requires manual speed synchronization, and to manually synchronize them if necessary, use the following command sequence. 1 Determine the local interface status. Refer to the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces [interface] status 2 Determine the remote interface status. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode [Use the command on the remote system that is equivalent to the first command.
Te 0/9 Te 0/10 Te 0/11 Te 0/12 Te 0/13 [output omitted] Down Down Down Down Down Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto ------ In the previous example, several ports display “Auto” in the Speed field, including port 0/1. In the following example, the speed of port 0/1 is set to 100Mb and then its auto-negotiation is disabled.
View Advanced Interface Information The following options have been implemented for the show [ip | running-config] interfaces commands. When you use the configured keyword, only interfaces that have non-default configurations display.
Example of the rate-interval Command The bold lines shows the default value of 299 seconds, the change-rate interval of 100, and the new rate interval set to 100.
• Configure the number of seconds of traffic statistics to display in the show interfaces output. CONFIGURATION Mode rate-interval Example of the rate-interval Command The bold lines shows the default value of 299 seconds, the change-rate interval of 100, and the new rate interval set to 100.
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 13908 packets, 1114396 bytes, 0 underruns 5555 64-byte pkts, 8213 over 64-byte pkts, 140 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 13727 Multicasts, 5 Broadcasts, 176 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 150 seconds): Input 300.00 Mbits/sec, 1534517 packets/sec, 30.00% of line-rate Output 100.00 Mbits/sec, 4636111 packets/sec, 10.
• (OPTIONAL) To clear statistics for all VRRP groups configured, enter the keyword vrrp. Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the vrid. • (OPTIONAL) To clear unknown source address (SA) drop counters when you configure the MAC learning limit on the interface, enter the keywords learning-limit. Example of the clear counters Command When you enter this command, confirm that you want the Dell Networking OS to clear the interface counters for that interface.
25 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) IPSec is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and file transfer protocols (FTPs) and can operate in Transport mode. In Transport mode, IPSec encrypts only the packet payload; the IP header is unchanged. This is the default mode.
myCryptoPolicy 10 ipsec-manual transform-set myXform-set session-key inbound esp 256 auth encrypt session-key outbound esp 257 auth encrypt match 0 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 21 match 1 tcp a::1 /128 21 a::2 /128 0 match 2 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 3 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.2 /32 0 3 Apply the crypto policy to management traffic.
26 IPv4 Routing The Dell Networking OS supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking operating system (OS).
Implementation Information In the Dell Networking OS, you can configure any IP address as a static route except IP addresses already assigned to interfaces. NOTE: The Dell Networking OS versions 7.7.1.0 and later support 31-bit subnet masks (/31, or 255.255.255.254) as defined by RFC 3021. This feature allows you to save two more IP addresses on point-to-point links than 30-bit masks. The system supports RFC 3021 with ARP.
• secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or use the show ip interface command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the second example.
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S 6.1.2.3/32 6.1.2.4/32 6.1.2.5/32 6.1.2.6/32 6.1.2.7/32 6.1.2.8/32 6.1.2.9/32 6.1.2.10/32 6.1.2.11/32 6.1.2.12/32 6.1.2.13/32 6.1.2.14/32 6.1.2.15/32 6.1.2.16/32 6.1.2.17/32 11.1.1.0/24 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
network load and speed, and it is not a consistent value. The MTU size can also be different for various types of traffic sent from one host to the same endpoint. Path MTU discovery (PMTD) identifies the path MTU value between the sender and the receiver, and uses the determined value to transmit packets across the network. PMTD, as described in RFC 1191, denotes that the default byte size of an IP packet is 576. This packet size is called the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IPv4 frames.
to the router for a specific service (such as SSH or BGP) with a SYN ACK, the router waits for a period of time for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host that will establish the TCP connection. You can set this duration or interval for which the TCP connection waits to be established to a significantly high value to prevent the device from moving into an out-of-service condition or becoming unresponsive during a SYN flood attack that occurs on the device.
CONFIGURATION mode • ip domain-lookup Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. Example of the show hosts Command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. Dell>show host Default domain is force10networks.com Name/address lookup uses domain service Name servers are not set Host Flags TTL Type Address -------- ----- ------- ------ks (perm, OK) - IP 2.2.2.
• Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] • The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. When you enter the traceroute command without specifying an IP address (Extended Traceroute), you are prompted for a target and source IP address, timeout in seconds (default is 5), a probe count (default is 3), minimum TTL (default is 1), maximum TTL (default is 30), and port number (default is 33434).
• ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP • ARP Learning via ARP Request • Configuring ARP Retries Configuring Static ARP Entries ARP dynamically maps the MAC and IP addresses, and while most network host support dynamic mapping, you can configure an ARP entry (called a static ARP) for the ARP cache. To configure a static ARP entry, use the following command. • Configure an IP address and MAC address mapping for an interface.
• no-refresh (OPTIONAL): enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM. Or to specify which dynamic ARP entries you want to delete, use this option with interface or ip ip-address. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number between 1 and 4094.
Figure 52. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries In the Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.3.1.0, the number of ARP retries is set to five and is not configurable. After five retries, the system backs off for 20 seconds before it sends a new request.
ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply). ICMP error messages inform the router of problems in a particular packet. These messages are sent only on unicast traffic. Configuration Tasks for ICMP The following lists the configuration tasks for ICMP.
Enabling UDP Helper To enable UDP helper, use the following command. • Enable UPD helper. ip udp-helper udp-ports Example of Enabling UDP Helper Example of the show ip udp-helper Command Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip udp-helper udp-port 1000 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 2.1.1.1/24 ip udp-helper udp-port 1000 no shutdown To view the interfaces and ports on which you enabled UDP helper, use the show ip udp-helper command from EXEC Privilege mode.
3 Packet 2 is also forwarded to the ingress interface with an unchanged destination address because it does not have broadcast address configured. Figure 53. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface.
Packet 2 is sent from a host on VLAN 101. It has broadcast MAC address and a destination IP address that matches the configured broadcast address on VLAN 101. In this case, Packet 2 is flooded on VLAN 101 with the destination address unchanged because the forwarding process is Layer 2. If you enabled UDP helper, the packet is flooded on VLAN 100 as well. Figure 55.
2005-07-05 11:59:36 %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY, Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:02:2D:8D:46:DC to 128.141.128.90 Packet 0.0.0.0:68 -> 255.255.255.
27 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
• Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Documentation and Chapter Location Introduction OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 9.9(0.0) Equal Cost Multipath for IPv6 9.9(0.0) IPv6 Services and Management 9.9(0.0) Telnet client over IPv6 (outbound Telnet) 9.9(0.0) OSPFv3 in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Configuring Telnet with IPv6 in this chapter Control and Monitoring in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Telnet server over IPv6 (inbound Telnet) 9.9(0.
Generally, ICMPv6 uses two message types: • Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. • Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes. With NDP, each node sends a request only to the intended destination via a multicast address with the unicast address used as the last 24 bits. Other hosts on the link do not participate in the process, greatly increasing network bandwidth efficiency. Figure 58. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.
The DNS server address does not allow the following: • link local addresses • loopback addresses • prefix addresses • multicast addresses • invalid host addresses If you specify this information in the IPv6 RDNSS configuration, a DNS error is displayed. Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group. Messages to join the multicast group (Join messages) are sent towards the RP and data is sent from senders to the RP so receivers can discover who are the senders and begin receiving traffic destined to the multicast group. For more information, refer to the Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP), Multicast IPv6, and Protocol Independent Multicast (IPv6) chapters in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide.
• Provides information on FP groups allocated for the egress acl. CONFIGURATION mode show cam-acl-egress Allocate at least one group for L2ACL and IPv4 ACL. The total number of groups is 4. Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface Dell Networking OS supports IPv6 addresses. Essentially, IPv6 is enabled in the Dell Networking OS simply by assigning IPv6 addresses to individual router interfaces. You can use IPv6 and IPv4 together on a system, but be sure to differentiate that usage carefully.
• For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/ port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then the loopback number. • For a port-channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then the port-channel number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID.
Example of show ipv6 Command Options Dell#show ipv6 ? accounting IPv6 accounting information cam IPv6 CAM Entries fib IPv6 FIB Entries interface IPv6 interface information mbgproutes MBGP routing table mld MLD information mroute IPv6 multicast-routing table neighbors IPv6 neighbor information ospf OSPF information pim PIM V6 information prefix-list List IPv6 prefix lists route IPv6 routing information rpf RPF table Dell# Showing an IPv6 Interface To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use
• To display information about Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes, enter ospf. • To display information about Routing Information Protocol (RIP), enter rip. • To display information about static IPv6 routes, enter static. • To display information about an IPv6 Prefix lists, enter list and the prefix-list name.
interface GigabitEthernet 2/2 no ip address ipv6 address 3:4:5:6::8/24 shutdown Dell# Clearing IPv6 Routes To clear routes from the IPv6 routing table, use the following command. • Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. EXEC mode clear ipv6 route {* | ipv6 address prefix-length} • *: all routes. • ipv6 address: the format is x:x:x:x::x. • mask: the prefix length is from 0 to 128.
28 iSCSI Optimization An Aggregator enables internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization with default iSCSI parameter settings(Default iSCSI Optimization Values) and is auto-provisioned to support: iSCSI Optimization: Operation To display information on iSCSI configuration and sessions, use show commands. iSCSI optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
• If you configured flow-control, iSCSI uses the current configuration. If you did not configure flow-control, iSCSI auto-configures flow control. • iSCSI monitoring sessions — the switch monitors and tracks active iSCSI sessions in connections on the switch, including port information and iSCSI session information. • iSCSI QoS — A user-configured iSCSI class of service (CoS) profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic.
You can configure the switch to monitor traffic for additional port numbers or a combination of port number and target IP address, and you can remove the well-known port numbers from monitoring.
Configuring iSCSI Optimization To configure iSCSI optimization, use the following commands. 1 For a non-DCB environment: Enable iSCSI. CONFIGURATION mode iscsi enable 2 (Optional) Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication is monitored. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16] [ip-address address] • tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests.
You can send iSCSI TLVs either globally or on a specified interface. The interface configuration takes priority over global configuration. The default is Enabled. 6 (Optional) Configures the advertised priority bitmap in iSCSI application TLVs. LLDP CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi priority-bits. The default is 4 (0x10 in the bitmap). 7 (Optional) Enter interface configuration mode to configure the auto-detection of Dell Compellent disk arrays.
show iscsi sessions Command Example Dell# show iscsi sessions Session 0: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg ISID: 400001370000 Session 1: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0f60c2002-0360018428d48c94-iom011 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.
29 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Dell Networking OS supports intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS). • • The IS-IS protocol is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS. The IS-IS protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
selector. All routers within an area have the same area portion. Level 1 routers route based on the system address portion of the address, while the Level 2 routers route based on the area address. The NET length is variable, with a maximum of 20 bytes and a minimum of 8 bytes. It is composed of the following: • • • area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI).
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
Implementation Information IS-IS implementation supports one instance of IS-IS and six areas. You can configure the system as a Level 1 router, a Level 2 router, or a Level 1-2 router. For IPv6, the IPv4 implementation has been expanded to include two new type, length, values (TLVs) in the PDU that carry information required for IPv6 routing. The new TLVs are IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs.
NOTE: When using the IS-IS routing protocol to exchange IPv6 routing information and to determine destination reachability, you can route IPv6 along with IPv4 while using a single intra-domain routing protocol. The configuration commands allow you to enable and disable IPv6 routing and to configure or remove IPv6 prefixes on links. Except where identified, the commands described in this chapter apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: 4 • For the Loopback interface on the RPM, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel, enter the keywords port-channel then a number from 1 to 255. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enter an IPv4 Address.
Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# none none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using Single-Topology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215.
ROUTER-ISIS mode graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual seconds} • • adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Number of active level-2 adjacencies: 1 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 Dell# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information.
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
distance Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
• For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or the Dell Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table. The prefix lists are globally applied on all interfaces running IS-IS.
distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] Enter the type of interface and slot/port information: • • For the Loopback interface on the RPM, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel, enter the keywords port-channel then a number from 1 to 255. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
• process-id the range is from 1 to 65535. • level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. • metric value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • match external the range is from 1 or 2. • match internal • metric-type: external or internal. • map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. Redistributing IPv6 Routes To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands.
area-password [hmac-md5] password The Dell Networking OS supports HMAC-MD5 authentication. • This password is inserted in Level 1 LSPs, Complete SNPs, and Partial SNPs. Set the authentication password for a routing domain. ROUTER ISIS mode domain-password [encryption-type | hmac-md5] password The Dell Networking OS supports both DES and HMAC-MD5 authentication methods. This password is inserted in Level 2 LSPs, Complete SNPs, and Partial SNPs.
Debugging IS-IS To debug IS-IS processes, use the following commands. • View all IS-IS information. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis • View information on all adjacency-related activity (for example, hello packets that are sent and received). EXEC Privilege mode debug isis adj-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • • interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only.
IS-IS Metric Styles The following sections provide additional information about the IS-IS metric styles.
Table 32. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only). The original isis metric value is displayed in the show config and show running-config commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style.
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style. Moving to transition and then to another metric style produces different results. Table 33.
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition narrow truncated value wide transition narrow transition truncated value wide transition transition truncated value Sample Configurations The following configurations are examples for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Router 1 IS-IS Sample Configuration — Router 2 IS-IS Sample Configuration — Router 3 The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. R1(conf)#interface Loopback 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.1.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ipv6 address 2001:db8:9999:1::/48 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip router isis 9999 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#router isis 9999 R1(conf-router_isis)#is-type level-1 R1(conf-router_isis)#net FF.F101.0002.0C00.1111.
R2(conf-if-lo-0)#ipv6 address 2001:db8:9999:1::/48 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#ip router isis 9999 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-lo-0)#router isis 9999 R2(conf-router_isis)#int gi 2/11 R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#ip address 10.0.12.2/24 R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#ipv6 address 2001:db8:9999:2::/48 R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#ip router isis 9999 R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#isis network point-to-point R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-2/11)#int gi 2/31 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#ip address 10.0.23.
R 3(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 3/14 R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#ip address 10.0.13.3/24 R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#ipv6 address 2001:db8:1022:3::/48 R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#ip router isis 9999 R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#isis circuit-type level-1 R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#isis network point-to-point R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/14)#interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#ip address 10.0.23.
30 Isolated Networks for Aggregators An Isolated Network is an environment in which servers can only communicate with the uplink interfaces and not with each other even though they are part of same VLAN. If the servers in the same chassis need to communicate with each other, it requires a non-isolated network connectivity between them or it needs to be routed in the TOR. Isolated Networks can be enabled on per VLAN basis.
31 Link Aggregation Unlike IOA Automated modes (Standalone and VLT modes), the IOA Programmable MUX (PMUX) can support multiple uplink LAGs. You can provision multiple uplink LAGs. The I/O Aggregator auto-configures with link aggregation groups (LAGs) as follows: • All uplink ports are automatically configured in a single port channel (LAG 128).
LACP functions by constantly exchanging custom MAC protocol data units (PDUs) across local area network (LAN) Ethernet links. The protocol packets are only exchanged between ports that you configure as LACP-capable. NOTE: In Standalone, VLT, and Stacking modes, you can configure a maximum of 16 members in port-channel 128. In PMUX mode, you can have multiple port-channels with up to 16 members per channel.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) The commands for Dell Networks’s implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as port-channels in the Dell Networking OS — are provided in the following sections. NOTE: For static LAG commands, refer to the chapter), based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
NOTE: A logical port channel interface cannot have flow control. Flow control can only be present on the physical interfaces if they are part of a port channel. To view the interface’s configuration, enter INTERFACE mode for that interface and use the show config command or from EXEC Privilege mode, use the show running-config interface interface command. When an interface is added to a port channel, Dell Networking OS recalculates the hash algorithm.
0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (inte
This command is applicable only in PMUX mode. 3 Add the interface to the second port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface Example of Moving an Interface to a New Port Channel The following example shows moving the TenGigabitEthernet 0/8 interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3.
3 Verify the manually configured VLAN membership (show interfaces switchport interface command). EXEC mode Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)# vlan tagged 2-5,100,4010 Dell#show interfaces switchport te 0/1 Codes: U x G i - Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN tagged Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 802.
To disable the auto LAG, use the no auto-lag enable command. When disabled, the server port is removed from the LAG and if the server port is the last member of the LAG, the LAG itself gets removed. Any LACPDUs received on the server port are discarded. In VLT mode, the interface level auto LAG configuration is not synced to the peer. Only the global auto LAG is synced to the peer. 3 View the auto LAG configurations.
Dell# config terminal Dell(config)# interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 Dell(config-if-te-0/1)# no auto-lag enable Dell(config-if-te-0/1)# show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport no auto-lag enable ! protocol lldp advertise management-tlv management-address system-name dcbx port-role auto-downstream no shutdown Dell# Configuring the Minimum Number of Links to be Up for Uplink LAGs to be Active You can activate the LAG bundle for uplink interfaces or ports (the uplin
0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
Enabling the Verification of Member Links Utilization in a LAG Bundle To examine the working efficiency of the LAG bundle interfaces, perform the following steps: 1 The functionality to detect the working efficiency of the LAG bundle interfaces is automatically activated on all the port channels, except the port channel that is configured as a VLT interconnect link, during the booting of the switch.
You can also use the show running-configuration interface port-channel command in EXEC Privilege mode to view whether the mechanism to evaluate the utilization of the member interfaces of the LAG bundle is enabled.
LACP LAG 128 is an aggregatable link LACP LAG 128 is a normal LAG A E I L O - Active LACP, B - Passive LACP, C - Short Timeout, D - Long Timeout Aggregatable Link, F - Individual Link, G - IN_SYNC, H - OUT_OF_SYNC Collection enabled, J - Collection disabled, K - Distribution enabled Distribution disabled, M - Partner Defaulted, N - Partner Non-defaulted, Receiver is in expired state, P - Receiver is not in expired state Port Te 0/9 is enabled, LACP is Port State: Bundle Actor Admin: State ADEHJLMP Oper:
show lacp 1 Command Example Dell# show lacp 1 Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e8e1.e1c3 Partner System ID: Priority 65535, Address 24b6.fd87.
Dell(conf)#int port-channel 11 Dell(conf-if-po-11)#portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-po-11)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-11)#vlan tagged 1000 % Error: Same VLAN cannot be added to more than one uplink port/LAG.
32 Layer 2 The Aggregator supports CLI commands to manage the MAC address table: • Clearing the MAC Address Entries • Displaying the MAC Address Table The Aggregator auto-configures with support for Network Interface Controller (NIC) Teaming. NOTE: On an Aggregator, all ports are configured by default as members of all (4094) VLANs, including the default VLAN. All VLANs operate in Layer 2 mode.
clear mac-address-table dynamic {all | interface {tengigabitethernet <0–5> | SLOT/PORT} } • all: deletes all dynamic entries. • interface: deletes all entries for the specified interface. Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table. EXEC Privilege mode NOTE: This command is available only in PMUX mode.
Network Interface Controller (NIC) Teaming NIC teaming is a feature that allows multiple network interface cards in a server to be represented by one MAC address and one IP address in order to provide transparent redundancy, balancing, and to fully utilize network adapter resources. Support for NIC teaming is auto-configured on the Aggregator, including support for: • MAC Address Station Move • MAC Move Optimization The below fig shows a topology where two NICs have been teamed together.
Figure 63. MAC Address Station Move MAC Move Optimization Station-move detection takes 5000ms because this is the interval at which the detection algorithm runs.
33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
Figure 64. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Segment TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit (LLDPDU), which is transmitted from one LLDP-enabled device to its LLDPenabled neighbors. LLDP is a one-way protocol. LLDP-enabled devices (LLDP agents) can transmit and/or receive advertisements, but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements. There are five types of TLVs (as shown in the below table). All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs.
Configure LLDP Configuring LLDP is a two-step process. 1 Enable LLDP globally. 2 Advertise TLVs out of an interface. Related Configuration Tasks • Viewing the LLDP Configuration • Configuring LLDPDU Intervals • Configuring a Time to Live • Debugging LLDP Important Points to Remember • LLDP is enabled by default. • Dell Networking systems support up to eight neighbors per interface. • Dell Networking systems support a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system.
no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show LLDP configuration Dell(conf-if-te-0/3-lldp)# Enabling LLDP LLDP is enabled by default. Enable and disable LLDP globally or per interface. If you enable LLDP globally, all UP interfaces send periodic LLDPDUs. To enable LLDP, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command.
• guest-voice • guest-voice-signaling • location-identification • power-via-mdi • softphone-voice • streaming-video • video-conferencing • video-signaling • voice • voice-signaling In the following example, LLDP is enabled globally. R1 and R2 are transmitting periodic LLDPDUs that contain management, 802.1, and 802.3 TLVs. Figure 66. Configuring LLDP Optional TLVs The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the following optional TLVs: Management TLVs, IEEE 802.1 and 802.
Figure 67. Organizationally Specific TLVs IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 37. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. The Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Type TLV Description whether the current settings are the result of auto-negotiation. This TLV is not available in the Dell Networking OS implementation of LLDP, but is available and mandatory (nonconfigurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell Networking supports the LLDP-MED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only.
Bit Position TLV Dell Networking OS Support 5 Inventory No 6–15 reserved No Table 39. LLDP-MED Device Types Value Device Type 0 Type Not Defined 1 Endpoint Class 1 2 Endpoint Class 2 3 Endpoint Class 3 4 Network Connectivity 5–255 Reserved LLDP-MED Network Policies TLV A network policy in the context of LLDP-MED is a device’s VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 configurations.
Type Application Description 5 Softphone Voice Specify this application type only if guest voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data. 6 Video Conferencing Specify this application type for dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video. 7 Streaming Video Specify this application type for dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video.
• LLDPDUs are transmitted and received by default. LLDPDUs are transmitted periodically. The default interval is 30 seconds. • LLDPDU information received from a neighbor expires after the default Time to Live (TTL) value: 120 seconds. • Dell Networking OS supports up to eight neighbors per interface. • Dell Networking OS supports a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system. If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum, the system does not configure more than 8000.
Example of Viewing Details Advertised by Neighbors Dell#show lldp neighbors detail ======================================================================== Local Interface Te 0/2 has 1 neighbor Total Frames Out: 6547 Total Frames In: 4136 Total Neighbor information Age outs: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 0 Total TLVs Discarded: 0 Next packet will be sent after 7 seconds The neighbors are given below: ------------------------------------------------------------
protocol lldp Dell(conf-lldp)# Configuring a Time to Live The information received from a neighbor expires after a specific amount of time (measured in seconds) called a time to live (TTL). The TTL is the product of the LLDPDU transmit interval (hello) and an integer called a multiplier. The default multiplier is 4, which results in a default TTL of 120 seconds. • Adjust the TTL value. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode. multiplier • Return to the default multiplier value.
Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving. To view the TLVs, use the following commands. • View a readable version of the TLVs. debug lldp brief • View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU. debug lldp detail Figure 71. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networkings OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects.
Table 41. LLDP Configuration MIB Objects MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description LLDP Configuration adminStatus lldpPortConfigAdminStatus Whether you enable the local LLDP agent for transmit, receive, or both. msgTxHold lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier Multiplier value. msgTxInterval lldpMessageTxInterval Transmit Interval value. rxInfoTTL lldpRxInfoTTL Time to live for received TLVs. txInfoTTL lldpTxInfoTTL Time to live for transmitted TLVs.
TLV Type 4 5 6 7 8 TLV Name Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Management Address TLV Variable port description system name system description system capabilities enabled capabilities management address length management address subtype management address interface numbering subtype interface number OID System LLDP MIB Object Remote lldpRemPortId Local lldpLocPortDesc Remote lldpRemPortDesc Local lldpLocSysName Remote lldpRemSysName Local
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable PPVID 127 VLAN Name VID VLAN name length VLAN name System LLDP MIB Object Remote lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEna bled Local lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanId Remote lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanId Local lldpXdot1LocVlanId Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanId Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Table 44.
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object L2 Priority Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyPri ority Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyP riority Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyDs cp Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyD scp Local lldpXMedLocLocationSubty pe Remote lldpXMedRemLocationSubt ype Local lldpXMedLocLocationInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocationInfo Local lldpXMedLocXPoEDeviceTy pe Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEDeviceT ype Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPow erSource DSCP Value 3 Location Identi
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erReq 486 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
34 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
With multicast NLB mode, the data is forwarded to all the servers based on the port specified using the Layer 2 multicast command, which is the mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , command in CONFIGURATION mode. Limitations With Enabling NLB on Switches The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
35 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Dell Networking OS supports multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP). Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
Figure 72. Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected.
Figure 73.
active sources in the area of the other RPs. If any of the RPs fail, IP routing converges and one of the RPs becomes the active RP in more than one area. New sources register with the backup RP. Receivers join toward the new RP and connectivity is maintained. Implementation Information The Dell Networking operating system (OS) implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446.
Figure 74.
Figure 75.
Figure 76.
Figure 77. Configuring MSDP Enabling MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains.
Example of Configuring MSDP Example of Viewing Peer Information R3_E600(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3_E600(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Local Addr State Source 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.3 Established Lo 0 SA 1 Up/Down Description 00:05:29 To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache).
To limit the number of sources that SA cache stores, use the following command. • Limit the number of sources that can be stored in the SA cache. EXEC Privilege mode show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in the system are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries.
Figure 78.
Figure 79.
Figure 80.
Figure 81. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1_E600(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1_E600(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
Figure 82. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
! interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface GigabitEthernet 3/41 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.12/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
36 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves on per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). Protocol Overview MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. In contrast, PVST+ allows a spanning tree instance for each VLAN.
• Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Networking OS Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Enable BPDU Filtering Globally • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Del
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
Example of the msti Command Example of Viewing MSTP Port States Dell(conf)#protocol spanning-tree mstp Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 1 vlan 100 Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 2 vlan 200-300 Dell(conf-mstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping. To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode.
To view the bridge priority, use the show config command from PROTOCOL MSTP mode. Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 2 bridge-priority 0 Dell(conf-mstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree mstp MSTI 2 bridge-priority 0 Dell(conf-mstp)# Interoperate with Non-Dell Networking OS Bridges The Dell Networking OS supports only one MSTP region. A region is a combination of three unique qualities: • Name is a mnemonic string you assign to the region. The default region name is null. • Revision is a 2-byte number.
Modifying Global Parameters The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, max-age, and max-hops and overwrites the values set on other MSTP bridges. • Forward-delay — the amount of time an interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before it transitions to the Forwarding state. • Hello-time — the time interval in which the bridge sends MSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
Example of the forward-delay Parameter To view the current values for MSTP parameters, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
The following lists the default values for port cost by interface. Table 46.
• If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the error disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
Figure 85. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface GigabitEthernet 3/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown SFTOS Example Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally
interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu • Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
“Same Region,” shown in bold in the following example shows that the MSTP routers are in a single region. Dell#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu MSTP debug bpdu is ON Dell# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Tengig 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.
37 Multicast Features Dell Networking OS supports multicast features.
Protocol Ethernet Address OSPF 01:00:5e:00:00:05 01:00:5e:00:00:06 RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • Egress L3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic if you enable multicast routing.
Limiting the Number of Multicast Routes When the total number of multicast routes on a system limit is reached, the Dell Networking OS does not process any IGMP or multicast listener discovery protocol (MLD) joins to PIM — though it still processes leave messages — until the number of entries decreases below 95% of the limit. When the limit falls below 95% after hitting the maximum, the system begins relearning route entries through IGMP, MLD, and MSDP.
In the following example, virtual local area network (VLAN) 400 is configured with an access list to permit only IGMP reports for group 239.0.0.1. Though Receiver 2 sends a membership report for groups 239.0.0.1 and 239.0.0.2, a multicast routing table entry is created only for group 239.0.0.1. VLAN 300 has no access list limiting Receiver 1, so both IGMP reports are accepted, and two corresponding entries are created in the routing table. Figure 86. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Table 47.
Location Description • • • ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.1/24 no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Rate Limiting IGMP Join Requests If you expect a burst of IGMP Joins, protect the IGMP process from overload by limiting that rate at which new groups can be joined. Hosts whose IGMP requests are denied will use the retry mechanism built-in to IGMP so that they’re membership is delayed rather than permanently denied. • Limit the rate at which new groups can be joined.
Figure 87. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group Table 48. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • • • ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
Important Points to Remember • Destination address of the mtrace query message can be either a unicast or a multicast address. NOTE: When you use mtrace to trace a specific multicast group, the query is sent with the group's address as the destination. Retries of the query use the unicast address of the receiver. • When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver.
• Source Network/Mask — source mask Example of the mtrace Command to View the Network Path The following is an example of tracing a multicast route. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.
The response data block filled in by the last-hop router contains a Forwarding code field. Forwarding code can be added at any node and is not restricted to the last hop router. This field is used to record error codes before forwarding the response to the next neighbor in the path towards the source. In a response data packet, the following error codes are supported: Table 50.
Scenario Output -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command specifying the source multicast tree and multicast group without specifying the destination. Mtrace traces the complete path traversing through the multicast group to reach the source. The output displays the destination and the first hop (-1) as 0 to indicate any PIM enabled interface on the node. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command by providing the source and multicast information. However, if the multicast group is a shared group (*,G), then mtrace traces the path of the shared tree until it reaches the RP. The source mask field reflects the shared tree that is being used to trace the path.
Scenario Output -3 10.10.10.1 PIM No route default ----------------------------------------------------------------- If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 99.99.0.0/16 -4 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------- If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
Scenario Output scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
38 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Dell Networking OS supports open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6). This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking operating system (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 88. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
Figure 89. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Internal Router (IR) The internal router (IR) has adjacencies with ONLY routers in the same area, as Router E, M, and I shown in the previous example. Designated and Backup Designated Routers OSPF elects a designated router (DR) and a backup designated router (BDR). Among other things, the DR is responsible for generating LSAs for the entire multiaccess network.
For all LSA types, there are 20-byte LSA headers. One of the fields of the LSA header is the link-state ID. Each router link is defined as one of four types: type 1, 2, 3, or 4. The LSA includes a link ID field that identifies, by the network number and mask, the object this link connects to. Depending on the type, the link ID has different meanings. • 1: point-to-point connection to another router/neighboring router. • 2: connection to a transit network IP address of the DR.
Figure 90. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with the Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS supports up to 16,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. The Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0 and later supports multiple OSPF processes (OSPF MP). The FN IOM switch supports up to 16 processes simultaneously. On OSPFv3, the system supports only one process at a time for all platforms. Prior to the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, the system supported one OSPFv2 and one OSPFv3 process ID per system.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 are supported in Helper and Restart modes. When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. The Dell Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAa as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
Internet Address 20.0.0.1/24, Area 0 Process ID 10, Router ID 1.1.1.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 1.1.1.2, Interface address 30.0.0.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 1.1.1.1, Interface address 30.0.0.2 Timer intervals configured, Hello 20, Dead 80, Wait 20, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:04 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 1.1.1.
Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)# Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)#show config ! router ospf 1 timers spf 2 5 msec Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)# Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)#end Dell# For a complete list of the OSPF commands, refer to the OSPF section in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide document. Enabling OSPFv2 To enable Layer 3 routing, assign an IP address to an interface (physical or Loopback). By default, OSPF, similar to all routing protocols, is disabled.
CONFIGURATION mode • no router ospf process-id Reset the OSPFv2 process. EXEC Privilege mode • clear ip ospf process-id View the current OSPFv2 status. EXEC mode show ip ospf process-id Example of Viewing the Current OSPFv2 Status Dell#show ip ospf 55555 Routing Process ospf 55555 with ID 10.10.10.
The first bold lines assign an IP address to a Layer 3 interface, and theno shutdown command ensures that the interface is UP. The second bold line assigns the IP address of an interface to an area. Example of Enabling OSPFv2 and Assigning an Area to an Interface Example of Viewing Active Interfaces and Assigned Areas Example of Viewing OSPF Status on a Loopback Interface Dell#(conf)#int tengig 4/44 Dell(conf-if-te-4/44)#ip address 10.10.10.
Adjacent with neighbor 10.168.253.5 (Designated Router) Adjacent with neighbor 10.168.253.3 (Backup Designated Router) Loopback 0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.168.253.2/32, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 10.168.253.2, Network Type LOOPBACK, Cost: 1 Loopback interface is treated as a stub Host. Dell# Configuring Stub Areas OSPF supports different types of LSAs to help reduce the amount of router processing within the areas.
Configuring LSA Throttling Timers Configured LSA timers replace the standard transmit and acceptance times for LSAs. The LSA throttling timers are configured in milliseconds, with the interval time increasing exponentially until a maximum time has been reached. If the maximum time is reached, the system continues to transmit at the max-interval. If the system is stable for twice the maximum interval time, the system reverts to the start-interval timer and the cycle begins again.
Example of Viewing Passive Interfaces When you configure a passive interface, the show ip ospf process-id interface command adds the words passive interface to indicate that the hello packets are not transmitted on that interface (shown in bold). Dell#show ip ospf 34 int TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.2.100/24, Area 1.1.1.1 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.
Dell(conf)#ex Dell#show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.2 Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Convergence Level 2 Min LSA origination 0 secs, Min LSA arrival 0 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 Dell# Dell#(conf-router_ospf-1)#no fast-converge Dell#(conf-router_ospf-1)#ex Dell#(conf)#ex Dell##show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.
• Key: a character string. NOTE: Be sure to write down or otherwise record the key. You cannot learn the key after it is configured. You must be careful when changing this key. • NOTE: You can configure a maximum of six digest keys on an interface. Of the available six digest keys, the switches select the MD5 key that is common. The remaining MD5 keys are unused. Change the priority of the interface, which is used to determine the Designated Router for the OSPF broadcast network.
Enabling OSPFv2 Authentication To enable or change various OSPF authentication parameters, use the following commands. • Set a clear text authentication scheme on the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf authentication-key key Configure a key that is a text string no longer than eight characters. • All neighboring routers must share password to exchange OSPF information. Set the authentication change wait time in seconds between 0 and 300 for the interface.
• Planned-only — the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart for planned restarts only. A planned restart is when you manually enter a fail-over command to force the primary RPM over to the secondary RPM. During a planned restart, OSPF sends out a Grace LSA before the system switches over to the secondary RPM. OSPF also is notified that a planned restart is happening. • Unplanned-only — the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart for only unplanned restarts.
• le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). For configuration information about prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). Applying Prefix Lists To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing OSPF routes, use the following commands. • Apply a configured prefix list to incoming OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Assign a configured prefix list to outgoing OSPF routes.
NOTE: The following is not a comprehensive list, just some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
• database-timers rate-limit: view the LSAs currently in the queue. Example of Viewing OSPF Configuration Dell#show run ospf ! router ospf 3 ! router ospf 4 router-id 4.4.4.4 network 4.4.4.0/28 area 1 ! router ospf 5 ! router ospf 6 ! router ospf 7 mib-binding ! router ospf 8 ! router ospf 90 area 2 virtual-link 4.4.4.4 area 2 virtual-link 90.90.90.90 retransmit-interval 300 ! ipv6 router ospf 999 default-information originate always router-id 10.10.10.
Figure 91. Basic Topology and CLI Commands for OSPFv2 OSPF Area 0 — Gl 1/1 and 1/2 router ospf 11111 network 10.0.11.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.12.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.1.11.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip address 10.2.12.2/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 10 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Gl 3/1 and 3/2 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.
OSPF Area 0 — Gl 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.2/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/2 ip address 10.2.22.
NOTE: IPv6 and OSPFv3 do not support Multi-Process OSPF. You can only enable a single OSPFv3 process. Enabling IPv6 Unicast Routing To enable IPv6 unicast routing, use the following command. • Enable IPv6 unicast routing globally. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 unicast routing Assigning IPv6 Addresses on an Interface To assign IPv6 addresses to an interface, use the following commands. 1 Assign an IPv6 address to the interface.
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID Globally To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 globally, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process globally and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} • The range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} • number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D. NOTE: Enter the router-id for an OSPFv3 router as an IPv4 IP address. • Disable OSPF.
Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. • For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information (for example, passiveinterface gi 2/1). • For a port channel, enter the keywords port-channel then a number from 1 to 255 (for example, passive-interface po 100) • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information (for example, passive-interface ten 2/3).
• route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map. Enabling OSPFv3 Graceful Restart Dell Networking OS supports graceful restart for OSPFv3. For more information about graceful restart, refer to Graceful Restart. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
• show run ospf Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example).
Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : 36 Gi 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec Dell Networking OS supports OSPFv3 authentication using IP security (IPsec). Starting in Dell Networking OS version 8.4.2.0, OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers.
• The security policy configured on an interface overrides any area-level configured security for the area to which the interface is assigned. • The configured authentication or encryption policy is applied to all OSPFv3 packets transmitted on the interface or in the area. The IPsec security associations (SAs) are the same on inbound and outbound traffic on an OSPFv3 interface. • There is no maximum AH or ESP header length because the headers have fields with variable lengths.
no ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec spi number • Remove null authentication on an interface to allow the interface to inherit the authentication policy configured for the OSPFv3 area. no ipv6 ospf authentication null • Display the configuration of IPsec authentication policies on the router. show crypto ipsec policy • Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces in authentication policies.
Configuring IPSec Authentication for an OSPFv3 Area To configure, remove, or display IPSec authentication for an OSPFv3 area, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4)). The security policy index (SPI) value must be unique to one IPSec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
area area-id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key authentication-algorithm [key-authentication-type] key • area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. • spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. • esp encryption-algorithm: specifies the encryption algorithm used with ESP. The valid values are 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL.
Inbound ESP Auth Key Outbound ESP Auth Key Inbound ESP Cipher Key Outbound ESP Cipher Key Transform set : : : : : 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name Policy refcount Inbound AH SPI Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key Outbound AH Key Transform set : : : : : : : OSPFv3-1-500 2 500 (0x1F4) 500 (0x1F4) bbdd96e6e
STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The Dell Networking OS has several tools to make troubleshooting easier. Consider the following information as these are typical issues that interrupt the OSPFv3 process. NOTE: The following troubleshooting section is not meant to be a comprehensive list, only examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
• packet: View OSPF packets. • For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information (for example, passiveinterface gi 2/1). • For a port channel, enter the keywords port-channel then a number from 1 to 255. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information (for example, passive-interface ten 2/3).
39 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Dell Networking OS supports policy-based routing.
To enable a PBR, you create a Redirect List. Redirect lists are defined by rules, or routing policies.
Interfaces in this case). It allows you to backup Indirect Next-hop with another, choose the specific Indirect Next-hop and/or Tunnel Interface which is available by sending ICMP pings to verify reach ability and/or check the Tunnel Interface UP or DOWN status, and then route traffic out to the next-hop and/or Tunnel Interface.
Use the following command in CONFIGURATION REDIRECT-LIST mode to set the rules for the redirect list. You can enter the command multiple times and create a sequence of redirect rules. Use the seq nn redirect version of the command to organize your rules. 1 Configure a rule for the redirect list.
Applied interfaces: None Multiple rules can be applied to a single redirect-list. The rules are applied in ascending order, starting with the rule that has the lowest sequence number in a redirect-list displays the correct method for applying multiple rules to one list.
Use the following command inINTERFACE mode to apply a redirect list to an interface. Multiple redirect-lists can be applied to a redirectgroup. It is also possible to create two or more redirect-groups on one interface for backup purposes. 1 Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) to an interface. INTERFACE mode ip redirect-group redirect-list-name redirect-list-name is the name of a redirect list to apply to this interface.
reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 35 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 5 ip 7.7.7.0/24 8.8.8.0/24, Track 5 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 5) seq 30 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 6 icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Track 5 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 5) seq 35 redirect 42.1.1.2 icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 40 redirect 43.1.1.2 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 30) seq 45 redirect 31.1.1.2 track 200 ip 12.0.0.0 255.0.0.197 13.0.0.0 255.0.0.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-3/23)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23), ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.
seq 15 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Nexthop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 20 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp any host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.
Apply the Redirect Rule to an Interface: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/28 Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#ip redirect-group explicit_tunnel Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit Dell(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
40 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Dell Networking OS supports protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM). PIM-SM is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop.
Requesting Multicast Traffic A host requesting multicast traffic for a particular group sends an Internet group management protocol (IGMP) Join message to its gateway router. The gateway router is then responsible for joining the shared tree to the RP (RPT) so that the host can receive the requested traffic. 1 After receiving an IGMP Join message, the receiver gateway router (last-hop DR) creates a (*,G) entry in its multicast routing table for the requested group.
Important Point to Remember If you use a Loopback interface with a /32 mask as the RP, you must enable PIM Sparse-mode on the interface. Configuring PIM-SM Configuring PIM-SM is a three-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing (refer to the following step). 2 Select a rendezvous point. 3 Enable PIM-SM on an interface. Enable multicast routing. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks.
NOTE: You can influence the selection of the Rendezvous Point by enabling PIM-Sparse mode on a Loopback interface and assigning a low IP address. To display PIM neighbors for each interface, use the show ip pim neighbor command EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip Neighbor Address 127.87.5.5 127.87.3.5 127.87.50.
[seq sequence-number] permit ip source-address/mask | any | host source-address} {destination-address/mask | any | host destination-address} 4 Set the expiry time for a specific (S,G) entry (as shown in the following example). CONFIGURATION mode ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds sg-list access-list-name The range is from 211 to 86,400 seconds. The default is 210.
• Use the override option to override bootstrap router updates with your static RP configuration. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing the Rendezvous Point (Multicast Group) Example of Viewing the Rendezvous Point (Multicast Group Range) To display the assigned RP for a group, use the show ip pim rp command from EXEC privilege mode. Dell#show ip Group 225.0.1.40 226.1.1.1 pim rp RP 165.87.50.5 165.87.50.
Enabling PIM-SM Graceful Restart To enable PIM-SM graceful restart, use the following commands. • Enable PIM-SM graceful restart (non-stop forwarding capability). CONFIGURATION mode ip pim graceful-restart nsf • (option) restart-time: the time the Dell Networking system requires to restart. The default value is 180 seconds. • (option) stale-entry-time: the maximum amount of time that the Dell Networking system preserves entries from a restarting neighbor. The default value is 60 seconds.
41 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) Dell Networking OS supports PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM). PIM-SSM is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
• The Dell Networking operating system (OS) reduces the number of control messages sent between multicast routers by bundling Join and Prune requests in the same message. Important Points to Remember • The default SSM range is 232/8 always. Applying an SSM range does not overwrite the default range. Both the default range and SSM range are effective even when the default range is not added to the SSM ACL. • Extended ACLs cannot be used for configuring SSM range.
To display the source to which a group is mapped, use the show ip igmp ssm-map [group] command. If you use the group option, the command displays the group-to-source mapping even if the group is not currently in the IGMP group table. If you do not specify the group option, the display is a list of groups currently in the IGMP group table that has a group-to-source mapping. To display the list of sources mapped to a group currently in the IGMP group table, use the show ip igmp groups group detail command.
Electing an RP using the BSR Mechanism Every PIM router within a domain must map a particular multicast group address to the same RP. The group-to-RP mapping may be statically or dynamically configured. RFC 5059 specifies a dynamic, self-configuring method called the Bootstrap Router (BSR) mechanism, by which an RP is elected from a pool of RP candidates (C-RPs). Some routers within the domain are configured to be C-RPs.
ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-Candidate interface [priority] [acl-name] The specified acl-list is associated to the rp-candidate. NOTE: You can create the ACL list of multicast prefix using the ip access-list standard command.
42 Port Monitoring The Aggregator supports user-configured port monitoring. See Configuring Port Monitoring for the configuration commands to use. Port monitoring copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG).
NOTE: By default, all uplink ports are assigned to port-channel (LAG) 128 and the destination port in a port monitoring session must be an uplink port. When you configure the destination port using the source command, the destination port is removed from LAG 128. To display the uplink ports currently assigned to LAG 128, enter the show lag 128 command.
• In general, a monitoring port should have no ip address and no shutdown as the only configuration; the Dell Networking OS permits a limited set of commands for monitoring ports. You can display these commands using the ? command. • A monitoring port may not be a member of a VLAN. • There may only be one destination port in a monitoring session. • A source port (MD) can only be monitored by one destination port (MG).
Port Monitoring on VLT Devices on which VLT is configured are seen as a single device in the network. You can apply port monitoring function on the VLT devices in the network. Port monitoring enables ingress or egress traffic traversing on a port to be sent to another port so that the traffic can be analyzed. The port to which traffic is sent for analysis is called the mirroring port. This port is connect to a port analyzer, which performs the traffic analysis function.
Table 52. RPM over VLT Scenarios Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring an Orphan Port on a VLT LAG — In this scenario, the orphan port on a VLT device is mirrored to the VLT LAG that connects a top-of-rack (TOR) switch to the VLT device. The packet analyzer is connected to the TOR switch. The bandwidth of the VLTi link is unnecessarily used by mirrored traffic if max rate limit value is configured in the RPM mirror session. Use ERPM session instead of RPM.
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring member port of ICL LAG to Orphan Port of peer vlt device— In this scenario, a member port of the ICL LAG or a member port of the VLT LAG is mirrored to an orphan port on the peer VLT device. The packet analyzer is connected to the peer VLT device. The bandwidth of the VLTi link is unnecessarily used by mirrored traffic if max rate limit value is configured in the RPM mirror session. None.
To configure an ERPM session: Table 53. Configuration steps for ERPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type erpm Specify a session ID and ERPM as the type of monitoring session, and enter the Monitoring-Session configuration mode. The session number needs to be unique and not already defined. 3 source { interface | range } direction {rx | tx | both} Specify the source port or range of ports.
interface Vlan 11 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1-3 mac access-group flow in <<<<<<<<<<<<<< Only ingress packets are supported for mirroring shutdown 614 Port Monitoring
43 Private VLANs (PVLAN) Dell Networking OS supports private VLAN (PVLAN) feature. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking operating system (OS) security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
• Community port — a port that belongs to a community VLAN and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with promiscuous ports. • Host port — in the context of a private VLAN, is a port in a secondary VLAN: • The port must first be assigned that role in INTERFACE mode. • A port assigned the host role cannot be added to a regular VLAN. • Isolated port — a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN.
• Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port. INTERFACE switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk} NOTE: Secondary VLANs are Layer 2 VLANs, so even if they are operationally down while primary VLANs are operationally up, Layer 3 traffic is still transmitted across secondary VLANs. NOTE: The outputs of the show arp and show vlan commands are augmented in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0 to provide PVLAN data.
Dell(conf-if-te-2/1)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)#switchport mode private-vlan host Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/3 Dell(conf-if-te-2/3)#switchport mode private-vlan trunk Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)#switchport mode private-vlan host Creating a Primary VLAN A primary VLAN is a port-based VLAN that is specifically enabled as a primary VLAN to contain the promiscuous ports and PVLAN t
ip local-proxy-arp NOTE: If a promiscuous or host port is untagged in a VLAN and it receives a tagged packet in the same VLAN, the packet is NOT dropped. Creating a Community VLAN A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN in a private VLAN. The ports in a community VLAN can talk to each other and with the promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN. 1 Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN that you want to make a community VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2 Enable the VLAN.
tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add ports defined as host to the VLAN. Example of Configuring Private VLAN Members The following example shows the use of the PVLAN commands that are used in VLAN INTERFACE mode to configure the PVLAN member VLANs (primary, community, and isolated VLANs).
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 93. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the FN IOM switch: • TenGig 0/0 and TenGig 0/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. • TenGig 0/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000.
NOTE: Even after you disable ip-local-proxy-arp (no ip-local-proxy-arp) in a secondary VLAN, Layer 3 communication may happen between some secondary VLAN hosts, until the ARP timeout happens on those secondary VLAN hosts. Inspecting the Private VLAN Configuration The standard methods of inspecting configurations also apply in PVLANs. To inspect your PVLAN configurations, use the following commands. • Display the specific interface configuration.
Example of Viewing VLAN Status Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C Community, I - Isolated Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack, H - VSN tagged i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM * 1 P 20 C 30 I 40 Dell# Status Description Q Ports Active U Te 5/41 Active T Te 1/1,5 Active T Te 1/2 Active T Te 1/3 Example of Viewing Private VLAN Config
44 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Dell Networking OS supports per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). For more information about spanning tree, refer to the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) chapter. Figure 94.
Table 54. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
Figure 95. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
Current root has priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.00f3 Number of topology changes 2, last change occured 00:14:39 ago on Po 23 Port 24 (Port-channel 23) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 1600, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.24 Designated root has priority 32768, address 001e.c9f1.00:f3 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 001e.c9f1.00:f3 Designated port id is 128.
PROTOCOL PVST mode vlan max-age The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. The values for global PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command. Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type.
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
Figure 96. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
! ! no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no
no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 Enable BPDU Filtering globally The enabling of BPDU Filtering stops transmitting of BPDUs on the operational port fast enabled ports by default. When BPDUs are received, the spanning tree is automatically prepared. By default global bpdu filtering is disabled. Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU port fast enabled interfaces. PROTOCOL PVST mode edge-port bpdu filter default Figure 97.
45 Quality of Service (QoS) Dell Networking OS supports quality of service (QoS). Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. The switch traffic has four data queues per port. All queues are serviced using the Weighted Round Robin scheduling algorithm. You can only manage prioritize queuing on egress.
Feature Direction Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress QoS Rate Adjustment Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 98.
Implementation Information The Dell Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
Example of Configuring a dot1p Priority on an Interface NOTE: The dot1p-priority command marks all incoming traffic on an interface with a specified dot1p priority and maps all incoming traffic to the corresponding queue. When you enable PFC and/or ETS on an interface, incoming traffic with a specified dot1p priority can be distributed across different queues.
Configuring Port-Based Rate Policing If the interface is a member of a VLAN, you may specify the VLAN for which ingress packets are policed. • Rate policing ingress traffic on an interface.
• Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently. • If single rate two color policer is configured along with this feature, then by default all packets less than PIR would be considered as “Green” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”.
3 Attach the policy-map to the interface. Dell Networking OS support different types of match qualifiers to classify the incoming traffic. Match qualifiers can be directly configured in the class-map command or it can be specified through one or more ACL which in turn specifies the combination of match qualifiers. Until Release 9.3(0.0), support is available for classifying traffic based on the 6-bit DSCP field of the IPv4 packet.
By default, all packets are considered as ‘green’ (without the rate-policer and trust-diffserve configuration) and hence support would be provided to mark the packets as ‘yellow’ alone will be provided. By default Dell Networking OS drops all the ‘RED’ or ‘violate’ packets.
seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map m
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 99. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations DSCP Color Maps This section describes how to configure color maps and how to display the color map and color map configuration.
Creating a DSCP Color Map You can create a DSCP color map to outline the differentiated services codepoint (DSCP) mappings to the appropriate color mapping (green, yellow, red) for the input traffic. The system uses this information to classify input traffic on an interface based on the DSCP value of each packet and assigns it an initial drop precedence of green, yellow, or red The default setting for each DSCP value (0-63) is green (low drop precedence).
Examples for Creating a DSCP Color Map Display all DSCP color maps. Dell# show qos dscp-color-map Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Display a specific DSCP color map. Dell# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration To display the DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces, use the show qos dscp-color-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} command in EXEC mode.
class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match ip After you create a class-map, the Dell Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL. 4 Link the class-map to a queue. POLICY MAP mode service-queue Example of Creating a Layer 3 Class Map Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl1 Dell(conf-std-nacl)#permit 20.0.0.
class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match mac After you create a class-map, the system places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4 Link the class-map to a queue.
Example of Marking Flows in the Same Queue with Different DSCP Values Dell#show run class-map ! class-map match-any example-flowbased-dscp match ip access-group test set-ip-dscp 2 match ip access-group test1 set-ip-dscp 4 match ip precedence 7 set-ip-dscp 1 Dell#show run qos-policy-input ! qos-policy-input flowbased set ip-dscp 3 Displaying Configured Class Maps and Match Criteria To display all class-maps or a specific class map, use the following command.
20418 20419 20420 20421 20422 24511 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 10 0 IP IP IP IP 0 0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23.64.0.2/32 0.0.0.0/0 23.64.0.3/32 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 10 12 14 - 1 0 1 0 1 0 In the previous example, the ClassAF1 does not classify traffic as intended. Traffic matching the first match criteria is classified to Queue 1, but all other traffic is classified to Queue 0 as a result of CAM entry 20419.
Configuring Policy-Based Rate Policing To configure policy-based rate policing, use the following command. • Configure rate police ingress traffic. QOS-POLICY-IN mode rate-police Setting a DSCP Value for Egress Packets Set the DSCP value for egress packets based on ingress QOS classification. The 6 bits that are used for DSCP are also used to identify the queue in which traffic is buffered.
Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping To configure policy-based rate shaping, use the following command. • Configure rate shape egress traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode rate-shape Allocating Bandwidth to Queue The Dell Networking recommends pre-calculating your bandwidth requirements before creating them. Make sure you apply the QoS policy to all the four queues and that the sum of the bandwidths allocated through them is exactly 100.
Dell#show run qos-policy-input ! qos-policy-input flowbased set ip-dscp 3 Dell# Specifying WRED Drop Precedence • Specify a WRED profile to yellow and/or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred For more information, refer to Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic. Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output. Creating Input Policy Maps There are two types of input policy-maps: Layer 3 and Layer 2. 1 Create a Layer 3 input policy map.
Applying an Input QoS Policy to an Input Policy Map To apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map, use the following command. • Apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map. POLICY-MAP-IN mode policy-aggregate Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets The Dell Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature. . The following table lists the standard DSCP definitions and indicates to which queues the Dell Networking OS maps DSCP values.
Table 59. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 The dot1p value is also honored for frames on the default VLAN. For more information, refer to Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN. • Enable the trust dot1p feature.
1 Match packets against match-any qos-AF4. If a match exists, queue the packet as AF4 in Queue 4, and if no match exists, go to the next class map. 2 Match packets against match-any qos-AF3. If a match exists, queue the packet as AF3 in Queue 3, and if no match exists, go to the next class map. 3 Match packets against match-all qos-BE1. If a match exists, queue the packet as BE1, and if no match exists, queue the packets to the default queue, Queue 0.
• Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy input Specify the keyword layer2 if the policy map you are applying a Layer 2 policy map; in this case, INTERFACE mode must be in Switchport mode. Creating Output Policy Maps 1 Create an output policy map.
Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment By default, while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, the Dell Networking OS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations.
threshold is reached (as shown in the following illustration); this procedure is the early detection part of WRED. If the maximum threshold, for example, 2000KB, is reached, all incoming packets are dropped until the buffer space consumes less than 2000KB of the specified traffic. Figure 100. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Table 60.
Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic the system should apply the profile. The Dell Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it. DSCP is a 6–bit field. Dell Networking uses the first 3 bits of this field (DP) to determine the drop precedence. • DP values of 110, 100, and 101 map to yellow; all other values map to green.
Displaying egress-queue Statistics To display egress-queue statistics of both transmitted and dropped packets and bytes, use the following command. • Display the number of packets and number of bytes on the egress-queue profile.
INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-fo-0/0)# ip address 90.1.1.1/16 2 Configure the Layer 2 policy with Layer 2 (Dot1p or source MAC-based) classification rules. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)# policy-map-input l2p layer2 3 Apply the Layer 2 policy on the Layer 3 interface.
QOS-POLICY-IN mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)#set ip-dscp 5 6 Create an input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#policy-map-input pp_policmap 7 Create a service queue to associate the class map and QoS policy map.
46 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The routing information protocol (RIP) is based on a distance-vector algorithm and tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. Topics: • Protocol Overview • Implementation Information • Configuration Information Protocol Overview RIP is the oldest interior gateway protocol.
Implementation Information The Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in the system. Table 61.
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in the system. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on the system. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
192.161.1.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:27, Fa 0/0 192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 0/0 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes.
redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric value] [routemap map-name] Configure the following parameters: • process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. • metric: the range is from 0 to 16. • map-name: the name of a configured route map. To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode.
Example of an Interface Participating in the RIP Process Example of Configuring an Interface to Send/Receive Specified Versions of RIP Example of the show ip protocols Command to Verify RIP Versions on an Interface To see whether the version command is configured, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. To view the routing protocols configuration, use the show ip protocols command in EXEC mode.
Generating a Default Route Traffic is forwarded to the default route when the traffic’s network is not explicitly listed in the routing table. Default routes are not enabled in RIP unless specified. Use the default-information originate command in ROUTER RIP mode to generate a default route into RIP. In the Dell Networking OS, default routes received in RIP updates from other routes are advertised if you configure the default-information originate command.
• • weight: the range is from 1 to 255. The default is 120. • ip-address mask: the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), and the mask in slash format (/x). • access-list-name: the name of a configured IP ACL. Apply an additional number to the incoming or outgoing route metrics.
Figure 101. RIP Topology Example RIP Configuration on Core2 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core2. Example of Configuring RIPv2 on Core 2 Core2(conf-if-gi-2/31)# Core2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#router rip Core2(conf-router_rip)#ver 2 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.200.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.300.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.
192.168.2.
Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.0 version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)# Core 3 RIP Output The examples in this section show the core 2 RIP output. • To display Core 3 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 3 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. • To display Core 3 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command.
Output delay 8 milliseconds between packets Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 3/44 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 3/43 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.11.20.0 10.11.30.0 192.168.2.0 192.168.1.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/44 ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
47 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
Setting the rmon Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
Configuring an RMON Event To add an event in the RMON event table, use the rmon event command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Add an event in the RMON event table. CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] • number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table.
Configuring the RMON Collection History To enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface, use the rmon collection history command in INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode. • Configure the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection. CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if) mode [no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner owner-string] [buckets bucketnumber] [interval seconds] • controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value.
48 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Dell Networking OS supports rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). The Dell operating system (OS) supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 62.
• The Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
To verify that RSTP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode. The bold line indicates that RSTP is enabled. Example of Verifying that RSTP is Enabled Dell(conf-rstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree rstp no disable Dell(conf-rstp)# Figure 102. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
The port is not in the Edge port mode, bpdu filter is disabled Port 378 (TenGigabitethernet 2/2) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.378 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
For bridge protocol data units (BPDU) filtering behavior, refer to Removing an Interface from the Spanning Tree Group. Modifying Global Parameters You can modify RSTP parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in the Rapid Spanning Tree group. • Forward-delay — the amount of time an interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before it transitions to the Forwarding state.
PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. Enable BPDU Filtering Globally The enabling of BPDU Filtering stops transmitting of BPDUs on the operational port fast enabled ports by default. When BPDUs are received, the spanning tree is automatically prepared. By default global bpdu filtering is disabled.
spanning-tree rstp cost cost The range is from 0 to 65535. • The default is listed in the previous table. Change the port priority of an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree rstp priority priority-value The range is from 0 to 240. The default is 128. To view the current values for interface parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner.
no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-2/0)# Influencing RSTP Root Selection RSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it is selected as the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root.
We are the root Configured hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 NOTE: The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond. hello times are encoded using values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256. When you configure millisecond hellos, the default hello interval of 2 seconds is still used for edge ports; the millisecond hello interval is not used.
49 Security Security features are supported on the I/O Aggregator. This chapter describes several ways to provide access security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Aggregator Command Line Reference Guide. Supported Modes Standalone, PMUX, VLT, Stacking NOTE: You can also perform some of the configurations using the Web GUI - Dell Blade IO Manager.
Accessing the I/O Aggregator Using the CMC Console Only This functionality is supported on the Aggregator. You can enable the option to access and administer an Aggregator only using the chassis management controller (CMC) interface, and prevent the usage of the CLI interface of the device to configure and monitor settings. You can configure the restrict-access session command to disable access of the Aggregator using a Telnet or SSH session; the device is accessible only using the CMC GUI.
• start-stop: use for more accounting information, to send a start-accounting notice at the beginning of the requested event and a stop-accounting notice at the end. • wait-start: ensures that the TACACS+ security server acknowledges the start notice before granting the user's process request. • stop-only: use for minimal accounting; instructs the TACACS+ server to send a stop record accounting notice at the end of the requested user process. • tacacs+: designate the security service.
Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting. To obtain accounting records displaying information about users currently logged in, use the following command. • Step through all active sessions and print all the accounting records for the actively accounted functions.
Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can assign up to five authentication methods to a method list. Dell Networking OS evaluates the methods in the order in which you enter them in each list. If the first method list does not respond or returns an error, Dell Networking OS applies the next method list until the user either passes or fails the authentication. If the user fails a method list, Dell Networking OS does not apply the next method list.
Enabling AAA Authentication To enable AAA authentication, use the following command. • Enable AAA authentication. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable {method-list-name | default} method1 [... method4] • default: uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user logs in. • method-list-name: character string used to name the list of enable authentication methods activated when a user logs in. • method1 [...
• RADIUS — When using RADIUS authentication, Dell Networking OS sends an authentication packet with the following: Username: $enab15$ Password: Therefore, the RADIUS server must have an entry for this username. Configuring Re-Authentication Starting from Dell Networking OS 9.11(0.0), the system enables re-authentication of user whenever there is a change in the authenticators.
Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network. However, at times, you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands. In the Dell Networking OS, you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system. Every command in the Dell Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0, 1, or 15. You can configure up to 16 privilege levels.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] [privilege level] [secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: • name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters long. • access-class access-list-name: Restrict access by access-class. • nopassword: Require password for the user to login. • encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: Enter a string. Specify the password for the user.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [privilege level] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] [secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: 2 • name: enter a text string (up to 63 characters). • access-class access-list-name: enter the name of a configured IP ACL. • privilege level: the range is from 0 to 15. • nopassword: do not require the user to enter a password. • encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text.
Dell#show running-config Current Configuration ... ! hostname FTOS ! enable password level 8 notjohn enable password FTOS ! username admin password 0 admin username john password 0 john privilege 8 ! The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed. In CONFIGURATION mode, john can access only the snmpserver commands.
• password: Enter a text string up to 25 characters long. To view the password configured for a terminal, use the show config command in LINE mode. Enabling and Disabling Privilege Levels To enable and disable privilege levels, use the following commands. • Set a user’s security level. EXEC Privilege mode enable or enable privilege-level • If you do not enter a privilege level, the system sets it to 15 by default. Move to a lower privilege level.
• Auto-Command • Privilege Levels Overview After gaining authorization for the first time, you may configure these attributes. NOTE: RADIUS authentication/authorization is done for every login. There is no difference between first-time login and subsequent logins. Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout.
Configure this value on the client system. Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} • This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists. To use the method list. CONFIGURATION mode authorization exec methodlist Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command.
• • seconds: the range is from 0 to 2147483647. The default is 0 seconds. Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the system and RADIUS server hosts. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server key [encryption-type] key • • encryption-type: enter 7 to encrypt the password. Enter 0 to keep the password as plain text. • key: enter a string. The key can be up to 42 characters long. You cannot use spaces in the key. Configure the number of times Dell Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests.
To select TACACS+ as the login authentication method, use the following commands. 1 Configure a TACACS+ server host. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {ip-address | host} Enter the IP address or host name of the TACACS+ server. Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2 Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method.
Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command. • View TACACS+ transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug tacacs+ TACACS+ Remote Authentication The system takes the access class from the TACACS+ server. Access class is the class of service that restricts Telnet access and packet sizes.
To view the TACACS+ configuration, use the show running-config tacacs+ command in EXEC Privilege mode. To delete a TACACS+ server host, use the no tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} command. freebsd2# telnet 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202 Trying 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202... Connected to 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202. Escape character is '^]'.
To disable SSH server functions, use the no ip ssh server enable command. Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image To use secure copy (SCP) to copy a software image through an SSH connection from one switch to another, use the following commands. 1 On Switch 1, set the SSH port number ( port 22 by default). CONFIGURATION MODE ip ssh server port number 2 On Switch 1, enable SSH. CONFIGURATION MODE copy ssh server enable 3 On Switch 2, invoke SCP.
User name to login remote host: admin Password to login remote host: Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell (SSH) is enabled by default using the SSH Password Authentication method. Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Client To configure the HMAC algorithm for the SSH client, use the ip ssh mac hmac-algorithm command in CONFIGURATION mode. hmac-algorithm: Enter a space-delimited list of keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server.
• aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr The default cipher list is in the given order: aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc. Example of Configuring a Cipher List The following example shows you how to configure a cipher list. Dell(conf)#ip ssh cipher aes128-ctr aes128-cbc 3des-cbc Telnet To use Telnet with SSH, first enable SSH, as previously described. By default, the Telnet daemon is enabled.
You can assign line authentication on a per-VTY basis; it is a simple password authentication, using an access-class as authorization. Configure local authentication globally and configure access classes on a per-user basis. Dell Networking OS can assign different access classes to different users by username. Until users attempt to log in, Dell Networking OS does not know if they will be assigned a VTY line.
• Privilege-or-Role Mode Versus Role-only Mode • Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization • System-Defined RBAC User Roles • Creating a New User Role • Modifying Command Permissions for Roles • Adding and Deleting Users from a Role • Role Accounting • Configuring AAA Authentication for Roles • Configuring AAA Authorization for Roles • Configuring an Accounting for Roles • Applying an Accounting Method to a Role • Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles • Configuring TAC
only AAA authorization is configured, access to commands is determined only by the user’s role. For more information, see Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization. Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization You can configure authorization so that access to commands is determined only by the user’s role. If the user has no user role, access to the system is denied as the user will not be able to login successfully.
To enable role-based only AAA authorization: Dell(conf)#aaa authorization role-only System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles. The system defined user roles are as follows: • Network Operator (netoperator) - This user role has no privilege to modify any configuration on the switch.
Consider the following when creating a user role: • Only the system administrator and user-defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and user names. Only the system administrator, security administrator, and roles inherited from these can use the "role" command to modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to.
The following output displays the modes available for the role command. Dell (conf)#role configure exec interface line route-map router ? Global configuration mode Exec Mode Interface configuration mode Line Configuration mode Route map configuration mode Router configuration mode Examples: Deny Network Administrator from Using the show users Command.
The following example removes the secadmin access to LINE mode and then verifies that the security administrator can no longer access LINE mode, using the show role mode configure line command in EXEC Privilege mode.
AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles This section describes how to configure AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.
Examples of Applying a Method List The following configuration example applies a method list: TACACS+, RADIUS and local: ! radius-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! tacacs-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! aaa authentication login ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa authorization exec ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa start-stop tacacs+ ! The following configuration example applies a method list other than default to each VTY line.
Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendor-specific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
The following example shows you how to configure AAA accounting to monitor commands executed by the users who have a secadmin user role. Dell(conf)#aaa accounting command role secadmin default start-stop tacacs+ Applying an Accounting Method to a Role To apply an accounting method list to a role executed by a user with that user role, use the accounting command in LINE mode.
secadmin sysadmin MAC testadmin Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol netadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Displaying Role Permissions Assigned to a Command To display permissions assigned to a command, use the show role command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays the user role and or permission level.
50 Service Provider Bridging Dell Networking OS supports service provider bridging. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. VLAN stacking enables service providers to use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. Using only 802.
Figure 104. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN. Configure VLAN Stacking Configuring VLAN-Stacking is a three-step process.
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. • Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
Example of Configuring a Trunk Port as a Hybrid Port and Adding it to Stacked VLANs In the following example, GigabitEthernet 0/1 is a trunk port that is configured as a hybrid port and then added to VLAN 100 as untagged VLAN 101 as tagged, and VLAN 103, which is a stacking VLAN.
VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes. In a VLAN-stacking network, after the frame is double tagged, the outer tag TPID must match the TPID of the next-hop system. While 802.1Q requires that the inner tag TPID is 0x8100, it does not require a specific value for the outer tag TPID.
Figure 105.
Figure 106.
Figure 107. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch Table 65. Behaviors for Mismatched TPID Network Position Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
Network Position Egress Access Point Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
Precedence Description Green High-priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. Yellow Lower-priority packets that are treated as best-effort. Red Lowest-priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status). • Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to the Dell Networking OS drop precedence. INTERFACE mode dei honor {0 | 1} {green | red | yellow} You may enter the command once for 0 and once for 1. Packets with an unmapped DEI value are colored green.
Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired. When an S-Tag is added to incoming customer frames, the 802.1p bits on the S-Tag may be configured statically for each customer or derived from the C-Tag using Dynamic Mode CoS. Dynamic Mode CoS maps the C-Tag 802.1p value to a S-Tag 802.1p value. Figure 108.
Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3. All other packets will have outer dot1p 0 and hence are queued to Queue 1. They are therefore policed according to qos-policy-input 1.
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
Dell Networking OS Behavior: In the Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell Networking-unique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN.
4 Set a maximum rate at which the RPM processes BPDUs for L2PT. VLAN STACKING mode protocol-tunnel rate-limit The default is: no rate limiting. The range is from 64 to 320 kbps. Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.
51 sFlow Dell Networking OS supports configuring sFlow. Topics: • Overview • Implementation Information • Enabling and Disabling sFlow • Enabling sFlow Max-Header Size Extended • sFlow Show Commands • Configuring Specify Collectors • Changing the Polling Intervals • Changing the Sampling Rate • Back-Off Mechanism • sFlow on LAG ports • Enabling Extended sFlow Overview The Dell Networking operating system (OS) supports sFlow version 5.
• If the interface states are shutdown, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate. • If the global sample rate is non-default, for example 256 bytes, and if the sampling rate is not configured on an interface, the sampling rate of the interface is the global non-default sampling rate, that is 256 bytes. To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured.
INTERFACE mode sflow max-header-size extended • • By default, the maximum header size of a packet is 128 bytes. If the traffic ingresses on an sFlow enabled interface, 256 bytes are copied. To reset the maximum header size of a packet, use the following command [no] sflow max-header-size extended View the maximum header size of a packet.
sflow enable sflow max-header-size extended Dell#show run int tengigabitEthernet 1/10 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 no ip address switchport sflow ingress-enable sflow max-header-size extended no shutdown sFlow Show Commands The Dell Networking OS includes the following sFlow display commands. • • • Displaying Show sFlow Global Displaying Show sFlow on an Interface Displaying Show sFlow on a Stack Unit Displaying Show sFlow Global To view sFlow statistics, use the following command.
Sub-sampling rate Counter polling interval Samples rcvd from h/w Samples dropped for sub-sampling :2 :15 :33 :6 Displaying Show sFlow on a Stack Unit To view sFlow statistics on a specified stack unit, use the following command. • Display sFlow configuration information and statistics on the specified interface.
Changing the Sampling Rate The sflow sample-rate command, when issued in CONFIGURATION mode, changes the default sampling rate. By default, the sampling rate of an interface is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value. Select one of these two numbers and re-enter the command. (For more information on values in power-of-2, refer to Sub-Sampling.
sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow Dell Networking OS supports extended-switch information processing only. Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depending on the type of sampled packet. You can enable the following options: • extended-switch — 802.1Q VLAN ID and 802.1p priority information. • extended-router — Next-hop and source and destination mask length.
52 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
Implementation Information The Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 as defined by RFC 1155, 1157, and 1212, SNMP version 2c as defined by RFC 1901. Configuring the Simple Network Management Protocol NOTE: The configurations in this chapter use a UNIX environment with net-snmp version 5.4. This is only one of many RFCcompliant SNMP utilities you can use to manage the Aggregator using SNMP. Also, these configurations use SNMP version 2c.
Dell#show running-config snmp ! snmp-server community mycommunity ro Dell# Setting Up User-Based Security (SNMPv3) When setting up SNMPv3, you can set users up with one of the following three types of configuration for SNMP read/write operations. Users are typically associated to an SNMP group with permissions provided, such as OID view. • noauth — no password or privacy. Select this option to set up a user with no password or privacy privileges. This setting is the basic configuration.
CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} Select a User-based Security Type Dell(conf)#snmp-server host 1.1.1.1 traps {oid tree} version 3 ? auth Use the SNMPv3 authNoPriv Security Level noauth Use the SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Security Level priv Use the SNMPv3 authPriv Security Level Dell(conf)#snmp-server host 1.1.1.
Displaying the Ports in a VLAN using SNMP Dell Networking OS identifies VLAN interfaces using an interface index number that is displayed in the output of the show interface vlan command. Example of Identifying the VLAN Interface Index Number Dell(conf)#do show interface vlan id 10 % Error: No such interface name.
The value 40 is in the first set of 7 hex pairs, indicating that these ports are in Stack Unit 0. The hex value 40 is 0100 0000 in binary. As described, the left-most position in the string represents Port 1. The next position from the left represents Port 2 and has a value of 1, indicating that Port 0/2 is in VLAN 10. The remaining positions are 0, so those ports are not in the VLAN.
In the following example, TenGigabitEthernet 0/7 is moved to VLAN 1000, a non-default VLAN. To fetch the MAC addresses learned on non-default VLANs, use the object dot1qTpFdbTable. The instance number is the VLAN number concatenated with the decimal conversion of the MAC address.
Interface index is 72925242 [output omitted] Monitor Port-Channels To check the status of a Layer 2 port-channel, use f10LinkAggMib (.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2). In the following example, Po 1 is a switchport and Po 2 is in Layer 3 mode. NOTE: The interface index does not change if the interface reloads or fails over. If the unit is renumbered (for any reason) the interface index changes during a reload. Example of SNMP Trap for Monitored Port-Channels [senthilnathan@lithium ~]$ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.11.
SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500934) 23:36:49.34 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkUp IF-MIB::ifIndex.1107755009 = INTEGER: 1107755009 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state to up: Po 1" Entity MIBS The Entity MIB provides a mechanism for presenting hierarchies of physical entities using SNMP tables. The Entity MIB contains the following groups, which describe the physical elements and logical elements of a managed system.
Enhancements 1 The dot1qVlanCurrentEgressPorts MIB attribute has been enhanced to support logical LAG interfaces. 2 Current status OID in standard VLAN MIB is accessible over SNMP. 3 The bitmap supports 42 bytes for physical ports and 16 bytes for the LAG interfaces (up to a maximum of 128 LAG interfaces). 4 A 59 byte buffer bitmap is supported and in that bitmap: • First 42 bytes represent the physical ports. • Next 16 bytes represent logical ports 1-128.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash Dell Networking provides more MIB objects to display the available memory size on flash memory. The following table lists the MIB object that contains the available memory size on flash memory. Table 68.
MIB Object OID Description chSysCoresProcess 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.19.1.2.9.1.5 Contains information that includes the process names that generated each core file. Viewing the Software Core Files Generated by the System • To view the viewing the software core files generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.1 = 1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.2 = 2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.4.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.5.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.6.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.7.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.8.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.9.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.10.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.11.
Viewing the Available Partitions on Flash • • 760 To view the available partitions on flash using SNMP, use the following command: snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -On 10.16.150.97 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.1 = STRING: "tmpfs" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.2 = STRING: "/dev/wd0i" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.3 = STRING: "mfs:477" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.4 = STRING: "/dev/wd0e" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.1 = INTEGER: 40960 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.
MIB Support to Display Egress Queue Statistics Dell Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the packets transmitted or dropped per unicast or multicast egress queue. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 72. MIB Objects to display egress queue statistics MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpEgrQTxPacketsRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.20.1.6 Rate of Packets transmitted per Unicast/ Multicast Egress queue. dellNetFpEgrQTxBytesRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.20.1.
INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.2.32.1.4.70.70.70.2.1.4.70.70.70.2 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.1.32.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.
MIB Support for entAliasMappingTable Dell Networking provides a method to map the physical interface to its corresponding ifindex value. The entAliasMappingTable table contains zero or more rows, representing the logical entity mapping and physical component to external MIB identifiers. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 74. MIB Objects for entAliasMappingTable MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2 Contains information about entAliasMapping table.
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAgg 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1 dot3adAggTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1 Contains information about every Aggregator that is associated with a system. dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggMACAddress 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 Contains a six octet read–only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator. dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggPortListPorts 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1.1 Contains a complete set of ports currently associated with the Aggregator. Viewing the LAG MIB • To view the LAG MIB generated by the system, use the following command. snmpbulkget -v 2c -c LagMIB 10.16.148.157 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356736 iso.2.
53 Stacking An Aggregator auto-configures to operate in standalone mode. To use an Aggregator in a stack, you must manually configure it using the CLI to operate in stacking mode. Stacking is supported on the FN410S and FN410T Aggregators with ports 9 and 10 as the stack ports. The Aggregator supports both ring and daisy-chain topology and stacking of the same type. FN 410S and FN 410T Aggregators support two-unit in-chassis stacking and up to six units stacking across the chassis.
• Interconnect the stack units by following the instructions in Cabling the Switch Stack. • You cannot stack a Standalone IOA and a PMUX. Master Selection Criteria A Master is elected or re-elected based on the following considerations, in order: 1 The switch with the highest priority at boot time. 2 The switch with the highest MAC address at boot time. 3 A unit is selected as Standby by the administrator, and a fail over action is manually initiated or occurs due to a Master unit failure.
3 Continue to run the stack-unit 0 stack-group <0-3> command to add additional stack ports to the switch, using the stackgroup mapping. Cabling the Switch Stack Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Aggregators are connected to operate as a single stack in a ring topology using the SFP+ or Base-T ports on the front end ports 9 and 10. To create a stack in either a ring or daisy-chain topology, you can use two units on the same chassis or up to six units across multiple chassis.
If the stacked switches all reboot at approximately the same time, the Aggregator with the highest MAC address is automatically elected as the master switch. The Aggregator with the next highest MAC address is elected as the standby master. NOTE: You can ensure that a stacked switch becomes the master by rebooting the switch first, and waiting for it to come up before rebooting the second switch in the stack. It is recommended to have the boot image for the stack units via boot from flash.
Resetting a Unit on a Stack Use the following reset command to reload any of the member units or the standby in a stack. If you try to reset the stack master, the following error message is displayed: % Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed. To reset a unit on a stack, use the following command: • Reset any designated stack member, except the management unit. EXEC Privilege mode • reset stack-unitunit-number {hard} Hard reset any stack unit including master unit.
functional through the merge process. If the stack merge is performed in this way, then it is strongly recommended that the user set the admin management preference of the desired winner stack manager to a higher value than the stack manager that should lose the election. NOTE: In case of a stack, when one unit member resets and joins the stack, momentary drops will be observed, which is recovered after few seconds.
Failure Scenarios The following sections describe some of the common fault conditions that can happen in a switch stack and how they are resolved. Stack Member Fails • Problem: A unit that is not the stack master fails in an operational stack. • Resolution: If a stack member fails in a daisy chain topology, a split stack occurs. If a member unit fails in a ring topology, traffic is rerouted over existing stack links.
10:55:20: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %KERN-2-INT: Error: Please check the stack cable/module and power-cycle the stack. ---------------------------------------STANDBY UNIT-----------------------------------------10:55:18: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %KERN-2-INT: Error: Stack Port 50 has flapped 5 times within 10 seonds.Shutting down this stack port now. 10:55:18: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %KERN-2-INT: Error: Please check the stack cable/module and power-cycle the stack.
Upgrading a Switch Stack To upgrade all switches in a stack with the same Dell Networking OS version, follow these steps. 1 Copy the new Dell Networking OS image to a network server. 2 Download the Dell Networking OS image by accessing an interactive CLI that requests the server IP address and image filename, and prompts you to upgrade all member stack units.
Upgrading a Single Stack Unit Upgrading a single stacked switch is necessary when the unit was disabled due to an incorrect Dell Networking OS version. This procedure upgrades the image in the boot partition of the member unit from the corresponding partition in the master unit.
54 Storm Control Storm control is supported on the Dell networking OS. The storm control feature allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The Dell Networking OS supports broadcast control (the storm-control broadcast command) for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. The minimum number of packets per second (PPS) that storm control can limit is two.
storm-control broadcast packets_per_second in • Configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress only) network only. INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in • Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets.
55 Broadcast Storm Control On the Aggregator, the broadcast storm control feature is enabled by default on all ports, and disabled on a port when an iSCSI storage device is detected. Broadcast storm control is re-enabled as soon as the connection with an iSCSI device ends. Broadcast traffic on Layer 2 interfaces is limited or suppressed during a broadcast storm. You can view the status of a broadcast-storm control operation by using the show io-aggregator broadcast storm-control status command.
56 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Dell Networking OS supports spanning tree protocol (STP).
• Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Related Configuration Tasks • Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group • Removing an Interface from the Spanning Tree Group • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying Interface STP Parameters • Enabling PortFast • Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard • STP Root Guard • SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Important Points to Remember • STP is disabled by default.
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 111. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
no disable To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Tengig 1/4 Dell# 8.514 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e80d.2462 8.514 Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Removing an Interface from the Spanning Tree Group To remove a Layer 2 interface from the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Disable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface.
PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hellotime. The range is from 1 to 10. • the default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
when it receives a BPDU. When you only implement bpduguard, although the interface is placed in an Error Disabled state when receiving the BPDU, the physical interface remains up and spanning-tree drops packets in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. PDU Filtering enabled on an interface stops sending and receiving BPDUs on the port fast enabled ports.
• You can clear the Error Disabled state with any of the following methods: • Perform a shutdown command on the interface. • Disable the shutdown-on-violation command on the interface (the no spanning-tree stp-id portfast [bpduguard | [shutdown-on-violation]] command). • Disable spanning tree on the interface (the no spanning-tree command in INTERFACE mode). • Disabling global spanning tree (the no spanning-tree in CONFIGURATION mode). Figure 113.
TenGigabitEthernet 3/20 unassigned YES None up up Dell# Global BPDU Filtering When BPDU Filtering is enabled globally, it stops transmitting BPDUs on the operational port fast enabled ports by default. When it receives BPDUs, it automatically participates in the spanning tree. By default global bpdu filtering is disabled. Figure 114.
Figure 115. BPDU Filtering Enabled Globally Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the root or secondary root.
STP Root Guard Use the STP root guard feature in a Layer 2 network to avoid bridging loops. In STP, the switch in the network with the lowest priority (as determined by STP or set with the bridge-priority command) is selected as the root bridge. If two switches have the same priority, the switch with the lower MAC address is selected as the root. All other switches in the network use the root bridge as the reference used to calculate the shortest forwarding path.
Figure 116. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: • Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
• pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port. To disable STP root guard on a port or port-channel interface, use the no spanning-tree 0 rootguard command in an interface configuration mode. To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following commands.
57 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 117.
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Dell#support-assist activity full-transfer start now Dell#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity. Allows you to configure customized details for a specific activity.
action-manifest remove Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.1 port 90 username test password 0 test1 Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 3 Enable communication with the SupportAssist server.
activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.com phone primary 123422 alternate 8395729 preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.
58 System Time and Date The Aggregator auto-configures the hardware and software clocks with the current time and date. If necessary, you can manually set and maintain the system time and date using the CLI commands described in this chapter.
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, you must include the differentiator between the UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
• offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to 1440. The default is 60 minutes. Example of the clock summer-time Command Dell(conf)#clock summer-time pacific date Mar 14 2012 00:00 Nov 7 2012 00:00 Dell(conf)# Setting Recurring Daylight Saving Time Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a specific day every year.
Example of Clock Summer-Time Recurring Parameters Dell(conf)#clock summer-time pacific recurring ? <1-4> Week number to start first Week number to start last Week number to start Dell(conf)#clock summer-time pacific recurring Dell(conf)# Configuring the Offset-Threshold for NTP Audit Log You can configure the system to send an audit log message to a syslog server if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). However, time synchronization still occurs.
59 Tunneling Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, OSPFv2, and OSPFv3 are also supported. ICMP error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported. Topics: • • • • • Configuring a Tunnel Configuring Tunnel keepalive Configuring the ip and ipv6 unnumbered Configuring the Tunnel allow-remote Configuring the Tunnel Source Anylocal Configuring a Tunnel You can configure a tunnel in IPv6 mode, IPv6IP mode, and IPIP mode.
tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
The following sample configuration shows the IP unnumbered command: Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 0/0 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 0/0 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.
60 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Supported Modes Standalone, PMUX, VLT, Stacking Topics: • Feature Description • How Uplink Failure Detection Works • UFD and NIC Teaming • Important Points to Remember • Uplink Failure Detection (SMUX mode) • Configuring Uplink Failure Detection (PMUX mode) • Clearing a UFD-Disabled Interface (in PMUX mode) • Displaying Uplink Failure Detection • Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection Feature Description UFD provides detection of the loss of upstr
Figure 118. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 119. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
For example, as shown previously, the switch/ router with UFD detects the uplink failure and automatically disables the associated downstream link port to the server. To continue to transmit traffic upstream, the server with NIC teaming detects the disabled link and automatically switches over to the backup link in order to continue to transmit traffic upstream. Important Points to Remember When you configure UFD, the following conditions apply. • • • You can configure up to 16 uplink-state groups.
3 Change the default timer. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode defer-timer seconds Dell(conf)#uplink-state-group 1 Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-1)#defer-timer 20 Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-1)#show config ! uplink-state-group 1 downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0/1-12 upstream Port-channel 128 defer-timer 20 Configuring Uplink Failure Detection (PMUX mode) To configure UFD, use the following commands. 1 Create an uplink-state group and enable the tracking of upstream links on the switch/router.
• A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. To delete an interface from the group, use the no {upstream | downstream} interface command. 4 (Optional) Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink-state group that will be disabled (Oper Down state) if one upstream link in the group goes down. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream disable links {number | all} • number: specifies the number of downstream links to be brought down. The range is from 1 to 1024.
clear ufd-disable {interface interface | uplink-state-group group-id} For interface, enter one of the following interface types: • 10 Gigabit Ethernet: enter tengigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range} • Port channel: enter port-channel {1-128 | port-channel-range} • Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/ port channels in any order; for example: tengigabitethernet 0/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5 • A comma is required to
EXEC mode show interfaces interface interface specifies one of the following interface types: • • • 10 Gigabit Ethernet: enter tengigabitethernet slot/port. Port channel: enter port-channel {1-128}. If a downstream interface in an uplink-state group is disabled (Oper Down state) by uplink-state tracking because an upstream port is down, the message error-disabled[UFD] displays in the output. Display the current configuration of all uplink-state groups or a specified group.
Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0/1-2,5,9,11-12 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 0/3-4 Dell#show uplink-state-group 3 Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up Dell#show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 0/3(Up) Te 0/4(Up) Downstream Interfaces : Te 0/1(Up) Te 0/2(Up) Te 0/5(Up) Te 0/9(Up) Te 0/11(Up) Te 0/12(Up) < After a single uplink port fails > Dell#show uplink-state-group detail (Up)
61 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator This chapter provides an overview of the PMUX mode. I/O Aggregator (IOA) Programmable MUX (PMUX) Mode IOA PMUX is a mode that provides flexibility of operation with added configurability. This involves creating multiple LAGs, configuring VLANs on uplinks and the server side, configuring data center bridging (DCB) parameters, and so forth. By default, IOA starts up in IOA Standalone mode.
Configuring the Commands without a Separate User Account Starting with Dell Networking OS version 9.3(0.0), you can configure the PMUX mode CLI commands without having to configure a new, separate user profile. The user profile you defined to access and log in to the switch is sufficient to configure the PMUX mode commands. The IOA PMUX Mode CLI Commands section lists the PMUX mode CLI commands that you can now configure without a separate user account.
• Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. • Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). • Provides link-level resiliency. • Assures high availability. As shown in the following example, VLT presents a single logical Layer 2 domain from the perspective of attached devices that have a virtual link trunk terminating on separate chassis in the VLT domain.
EXEC mode Dell# show interfaces port brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel O - OpenFlow Controller Port-channel LAG L 127 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 00:18:22 128 L2 up 00:00:00 Ports Fo 0/33 Fo 0/37 Fo 0/41 (Up)<<<<<<<
• If the lacp-ungroup feature is not supported on the ToR, reboot the VLT peers one at a time. After rebooting, verify that VLTi (ICL) is active before attempting DHCP connectivity. Configuration Notes When you configure VLT, the following conditions apply. • • 824 VLT domain • A VLT domain supports two chassis members, which appear as a single logical device to network access devices connected to VLT ports through a port channel.
NOTE: If you configure the VLT system MAC address or VLT unit-id on only one of the VLT peer switches, the link between the VLT peer switches is not established. Each VLT peer switch must be correctly configured to establish the link between the peers. • • • • • If the link between the VLT peer switches is established, changing the VLT system MAC address or the VLT unit-id causes the link between the VLT peer switches to become disabled.
• primary switch checks the status of the remote peer using the backup link. If the remote peer is up, the secondary switch disables all VLT ports on its device to prevent loops. • If all ports in the VLT interconnect fail, or if the messaging infrastructure fails to communicate across the interconnect trunk, the VLT management system uses the backup link interface to determine whether the failure is a link-level failure or whether the remote peer has failed entirely.
The delay-restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied, then starts a configurable timer. After the timer expires, the VLT ports are enabled one-by-one in a controlled manner. The delay between bringing up each VLT port-channel is proportional to the number of physical members in the port-channel. The default is 90 seconds.
show interfaces interface • interface: specify one of the following interface types: • 10-Gigabit Ethernet: enter tengigabitethernet slot/port. • Port channel: enter port-channel {1-128}. Example of the show vlt backup-link Command Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.
Example of the show vlt detail Command Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------100 127 Peer LAG Id ----------100 2 Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs ------------ ----------- ------------UP UP 10, 20, 30 UP UP 20, 30 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------2 100 Peer LAG Id ----------127 100 Local Status -----------UP UP Peer Status ----------UP UP Active VLANs ------------20, 30 10, 20, 30 Example of the show vlt role Command Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt role VLT Role --
---------------HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: ICL Hello's Sent: ICL Hello's Received: 994 978 89 89 VLT Sample Configurations To configure VLT, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, create a VLT domain, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, and connect the peer switches in a VLT domain to an attached access device (switch or server). Review the following examples of VLT configurations. Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 1) Configure the backup link.
Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#ip address 10.11.206.35/ Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#exit Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi).
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell Networking representative. Table 79. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time A syslog error message is generated. A syslog error message is generated.
62 NPIV Proxy Gateway The N-port identifier virtualization (NPIV) Proxy Gateway (NPG) feature provides FCoE-FC bridging capability on the FN 2210S Aggregator, allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the FN 2210S Aggregator.
The NPIV proxy gateway aggregates multiple locally connected server CNA ports into one or more upstream N port links, conserving the number of ports required on an upstream FC core switch while providing an FCoE-to-FC bridging functionality. The upstream N ports on an FX2 can connect to the same or multiple fabrics.
Term Description N port Port mode of an Aggregator with the FC port that connects to an F port on an FC switch in a SAN fabric. On an Aggregator with the NPIV proxy gateway, an N port also functions as a proxy for multiple server CNA-port connections. ENode port Port mode of a server-facing Aggregator with the Ethernet port that provides access to FCF functionality on a fabric. CNA port N-port functionality on an FCoE-enabled server port.
An FCoE map applies the following parameters on server-facing Ethernet and fabric-facing FC ports on the Aggregator: • The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic. • The FC-MAP value used to generate a fabric-provided MAC address. • The association between the FCoE VLAN ID and FC fabric ID where the desired storage arrays are installed. Each Fibre Channel fabric serves as an isolated SAN topology within the same physical network.
-------------------PG:0 TSA:ETS BW:30 PFC:OFF Priorities:0 1 2 5 6 7 PG:1 TSA:ETS Priorities:4 BW:30 PFC:OFF PG:2 TSA:ETS Priorities:3 BW:40 PFC:ON Default FCoE map Dell(conf)#do show fcoe-map Fabric Name Fabric Id Vlan Id Vlan priority FC-MAP FKA-ADV-Period Fcf Priority Config-State Oper-State Members Fc 0/9 Te 0/4 SAN_FABRIC 1002 1002 3 0efc00 8 128 ACTIVE UP DCB_MAP_PFC_OFF Dell(conf)#do show qos dcb-map DCB_MAP_PFC_OFF ----------------------State :In-Progress PfcMode:OFF -------------------Dell(
dcb-map name 2 Configure the PFC setting (on or off) and the ETS bandwidth percentage allocated to traffic in each priority group. Configure whether the priority group traffic should be handled with strict-priority scheduling. The sum of all allocated bandwidth percentages must be 100 percent. Strict-priority traffic is serviced first. Afterward, bandwidth allocated to other priority groups is made available and allocated according to the specified percentages.
Repeat this step to apply a DCB map to more than one port or port channel. INTERFACE mode dcb-map name Dell# interface tengigabitEthernet 0/0 Dell(config-if-te-0/0)# dcb-map SAN_DCB1 Creating an FCoE VLAN Create a dedicated VLAN to send and receive Fibre Channel traffic over FCoE links between servers and a fabric over an NPG. The NPG receives FCoE traffic and forwards decapsulated FC frames over FC links to SAN switches in a specified fabric. 1 Create the dedicated VLAN for FCoE traffic. Range: 2–4094.
description text 4 Specify the FC-MAP value used to generate a fabric-provided MAC address, which is required to send FCoE traffic from a server on the FCoE VLAN to the FC fabric specified in Step 2. Enter a unique MAC address prefix as the FC-MAP value for each fabric. Range: 0EFC00–0EFCFF. Default: None. FCoE MAP mode fc-map fc-map-value 5 Configure the priority used by a server CNA to select the FCF for a fabric login (FLOGI). Range: 1–255. Default: 128.
no shutdown Applying an FCoE Map on Fabric-facing FC Ports The Aggregator, with the FC ports, are configured by default to operate in N port mode to connect to an F port on an FC switch in a fabric. You can apply only one FCoE map on an FC port. When you apply an FCoE map on a fabric-facing FC port, the FC port becomes part of the FCoE fabric, whose settings in the FCoE map are configured on the port and exported to downstream server CNA ports.
Dell(config-dcbx-name)# priority-group 2 bandwidth 20 pfc on Dell(config-dcbx-name)# priority-group 4 strict-priority pfc off Dell(conf-dcbx-name)# priority-pgid 0 0 0 1 2 4 4 4 2 Apply the DCB map on a downstream (server-facing) Ethernet port: Dell(config)# interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 Dell(config-if-te-0/0)#dcb-map SAN_DCB_MAP 3 Create the dedicated VLAN to be used for FCoE traffic: Dell(conf)#interface vlan 1002 4 Configure an FCoE map to be applied on downstream (server-facing) Ethernet and ups
Command Description NOTE: Although the show interface status command displays the Fiber Channel (FC) interfaces with the abbreviated label of 'Fc' in the output, if you attempt to specify a FC interface by using the interface fc command in the CLI interface, an error message is displayed. You must configure FC interfaces by using the interface fi command in CONFIGURATION mode. show fcoe-map [brief | map-name] Displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps.
Speed Transmission speed (in Megabits per second) of Ethernet and FC ports, including autonegotiated speed (Auto). Duplex Data transmission mode: Full (allows communication in both directions at the same time), Half (allows communication in both directions but not at the same time), Auto (auto-negotiated transmission). VLAN VLAN IDs of the VLANs in which the port is a member.
Oper-State Operational status of the link to the fabric: up (link is up and transmitting FC traffic), down (link is down and not transmitting FC traffic), link-wait (link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer FC port), or removed (port has been shut down). Members Aggregator with the FC ports, which are members of the dedicated FCoE VLAN that carries storage traffic to the specified fabric.
Te 0/12 LOGGED_IN 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cb 1003 Fc 0/10 fid_1003 FDISC Table 85. show npiv devices brief Field Descriptions Field Description Total NPIV Devices Number of downstream ENodes connected to a fabric over the Aggregator with the NPG. ENode-Intf Aggregator with the Ethernet interface (slot/port) to which a server CNA is connected. ENode-WWPN Worldwide port name (WWPN) of a server CNA port. FCoE-Vlan VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic to and from the fabric.
Table 86. show npiv devices Field Descriptions Field Description ENode [number] Server CNA that has successfully logged in to a fabric over an Aggregator with the Ethernet port in ENode mode. Enode MAC MAC address of a server CNA port. Enode Intf Port number of a server-facing Ethernet port operating in ENode mode. FCF MAC Fibre Channel forwarder MAC: MAC address of Aggregator with the FCF interface.
63 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://support.dell.
64 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Dell Networking OS supports virtual LANs (VLANs). VLANs are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The Dell Networking operating system (OS) supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
By default, VLAN 1 is the Default VLAN. To change that designation, use the default vlan-id command in CONFIGURATION mode. You cannot delete the Default VLAN. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. • Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN.
Figure 121. Tagged Frame Format The tag header contains some key information that the Dell Networking OS uses: • The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). • Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total). The VLAN ID can have 4,096 values, but two are reserved. NOTE: The insertion of the tag header into the Ethernet frame increases the size of the frame to more than the 1,518 bytes as specified in the IEEE 802.
Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
2 Active 3 Active T T T T Po1(So Tengig Po1(So Tengig 0/0-1) 3/0 0/0-1) 3/1 Dell#config Dell(conf)#int vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q Ports * 1 Inactive 2 Active T Po1(So 0/0-1) T Tengig 3/0 3 Active T Po1(So 0/0-1) T Tengig 3/1 4 Active T Po1(So 0/0-1) Dell# When you remove a tagged interface from a VLAN (using the no tagge
Dell#conf Dell(conf)#int vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged tengig 3/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged Tengigabitethernet 3/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q Ports * 1 Inactive 2 Active T Po1(So T Tengig 3 Active T Po1(So T Tengig 4 Active U Tengig Dell# 0/0-1) 3/0 0/0-1) 3/1 3/2 The only way to remove an interface from the Default VLAN is to place the interface in Default mode by using the no switchport co
NOTE: You cannot configure an existing switchport or port channel interface for Native VLAN. Interfaces must have no other Layer 2 or Layer 3 configurations when using the portmode hybrid command or a message similar to this displays: % Error: Port is in Layer-2 mode Gi 5/6. To configure a port so that it can be a member of an untagged and tagged VLANs, use the following commands. 1 Remove any Layer 2 or Layer 3 configurations from the interface. INTERFACE mode 2 Configure the interface for Hybrid mode.
65 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Dell Networking OS supports virtual link trunking (VLT). Overview VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology. (To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol.
Figure 122. Virtual Link Trunking Multi-domain VLT A multi-domain VLT (mVLT) configuration creates a port channel between two VLT domains by allowing two different VLT domains, using different VLT Domain ID numbers, connected by a standard LACP LAG to form a loop-free Layer 2 topology in the aggregation layer. This configuration supports a maximum of four (4) nodes per mVLT domain, increasing the number of available ports and allowing for dual redundancy of the VLT.
Figure 123. Multi-Domain VLT Example VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the vitality of VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches.
• If the lacp-ungroup feature is not supported on the ToR, reboot the VLT peers one at a time. After rebooting, verify that VLTi (ICL) is active before attempting DHCP connectivity. • When you enable IGMP snooping on the VLT peers, ensure the value of the delay-restore command is not less than the query interval.
• The system automatically includes the required VLANs in VLTi. You do not need to manually select VLANs. • VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached to non-VLT ports. • Port-channel link aggregation (LAG) across the ports in the VLT interconnect is required; individual ports are not supported. Dell Networking strongly recommends configuring a static LAG for VLTi.
• • VLT allows multiple active parallel paths from access switches to VLT chassis. • VLT supports port-channel links with LACP between access switches and VLT peer switches. Dell Networking recommends using static port channels on VLTi. • If VLTi connectivity with a peer is lost but the VLT backup connectivity indicates that the peer is still alive, the VLT ports on the Secondary peer are orphaned and are shut down.
enables data forwarding across the interconnect trunk for packets that would otherwise have been forwarded over the failed port channel. This mechanism ensures reachability and provides loop management. If the VLT interconnect fails, the VLT software on the primary switch checks the status of the remote peer using the backup link. If the remote peer is up, the secondary switch disables all VLT ports on its device to prevent loops.
VLT and IGMP Snooping When configuring IGMP Snooping with VLT, ensure the configurations on both sides of the VLT trunk are identical to get the same behavior on both sides of the trunk. When you configure IGMP snooping on a VLT node, the dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are automatically learned on the VLT peer node. VLT Port Delayed Restoration With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.12.
Figure 124. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
You can configure virtual link trunking (VLT) peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain. If the VLT node elected as the designated router fails, traffic loss occurs until another VLT node is elected the designated router. VLT Multicast VLT multicast provides multiple alternate paths for resiliency against link and node failures.
4 Configure a PIM-SM compatible VLT node as a designated router (DR). For more information, refer to Configuring a Designated Router. 5 Configure a PIM-enabled external neighboring router as a rendezvous point (RP). For more information, refer to Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point. 6 Configure the VLT VLAN routing metrics to prefer VLT VLAN interfaces over non-VLT VLAN interfaces. For more information, refer to Classify Traffic.
Non-VLT ARP Sync In the Dell Networking OS version 9.2(0.0), ARP entries (including ND entries) learned on other ports are synced with the VLT peer to support station move scenarios. Prior to Dell Networking OS version 9.2.(0.0), only ARP entries learned on VLT ports were synced between peers. Additionally, ARP entries resulting from station movements from VLT to non-VLT ports or to different non-VLT ports are learned on the non-VLT port and synced with the peer node.
Sample RSTP Configuration The following is a sample of an RSTP configuration. Using the example shown in the Protocol Overview section as a sample VLT topology, the primary VLT switch sends BPDUs to an access device (switch or server) with its own RSTP bridge ID. BPDUs generated by an RSTP-enabled access device are only processed by the primary VLT switch. The secondary VLT switch tunnels the BPDUs that it receives to the primary VLT switch over the VLT interconnect.
CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Configuring VLT and Connecting a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2 Remove an IP address from the interface. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel.
Configuring a VLT Port Delay Period To configure a VLT port delay period, use the following commands. 1 Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the restoration of the VLT ports after the system is rebooted. CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode unit-id {0 | 1} To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the unit-id command. Configure a different unit ID (0 or 1) on each peer switch. Unit IDs are used for internal system operations. Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to determine the unit ID assigned to each peer switch when one peer switch reboots.
To configure the VLAN where a VLT peer forwards received packets over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peerdown-vlan parameter. When a VLT peer with BMP reboots, untagged DHCP discover packets are sent to the peer over the VLTi. Using this configuration ensures the DHCP discover packets are forwarded to the VLAN that has the DHCP server. Configuring a VLT VLAN Peer-Down (Optional) To configure a VLT VLAN peer-down, use the following commands.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 5 Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode back-up destination ip-address [interval seconds] You can optionally specify the time interval used to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds.
11 Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown 12 Add links to the mVLT port. Configure a range of interfaces to bulk configure. CONFIGURATION mode interface range {port-channel id} 13 Enable LACP on the LAN port. INTERFACE mode port-channel-protocol lacp 14 Configure the LACP port channel mode. INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15 Ensure that the interface is active.
EXEC mode show vlt statistics Display the RSTP configuration on a VLT peer switch, including the status of port channels used in the VLT interconnect trunk and to connect to access devices. • EXEC mode show spanning-tree rstp Display the current status of a port or port-channel interface used in the VLT domain. • EXEC mode show interfaces interface • interface: specify one of the following interface types: • Fast Ethernet: enter fastethernet slot/port.
Example of the show vlt detail Command Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------100 127 Peer LAG Id ----------100 2 Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs ------------ ----------- ------------UP UP 10, 20, 30 UP UP 20, 30 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------2 100 Peer LAG Id ----------127 100 Local Status -----------UP UP Peer Status ----------UP UP Active VLANs ------------20, 30 10, 20, 30 Example of the show vlt role Command Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt role VLT Role --
HeartBeat Messages Received: 978 ICL Hello's Sent: 89 ICL Hello's Received: 89 Example of the show spanning-tree rstp Command The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt). Dell_VLTpeer1# show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.
NOTE: To benefit from the protocol negotiations, Dell Networking recommends configuring VLTs used as facing hosts/ switches with LACP. Both peers must use the same port channel ID. 3 Configure the peer-link port-channel in the VLT domains of each peer unit. INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL mode channel-member 4 Configure the backup link between the VLT peer units. Configure the peer 2 management ip/ interface ip for which connectivity is present in VLT peer 1.
2 Configure the peer-link port-channel in the VLT domains of each peer unit. fniom-2(conf)#interface port-channel 1 fniom-2(conf-if-po-1)#channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/4-7 fniom-2(conf)#no shutdown fniom-4(conf)#interface port-channel 1 fniom-4(conf-if-po-1)#channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/4-7 fniom-4(conf)#no shutdown Configure the backup link between the VLT peer units 1 Configure the peer 2 management ip/ interface ip for which connectivity is present in VLT peer 1.
fniom-2# fniom-4#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 0/40 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/40 no ip address ! port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 2 mode active no shutdown fniom-4# configuring VLT peer lag in VLT fniom-4#show running-config interface port-channel 2 ! interface Port-channel 2 no ip address switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown fniom-4# fniom-4#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports L 2 L2L3 up 03:33:14 Te 0
Version Local System MAC address Remote System MAC address Remote system version Delay-Restore timer Delay-Restore Abort Threshold Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout Dell# : : : : : 6(3) 00:01:e8:8a:e9:91 00:01:e8:8a:e9:76 6(3) 90 seconds : 60 seconds : Disabled : 0 seconds : 150 seconds Dell#FTOS(conf-if-vl-100)#show vlt detail Local LAG Id Peer LAG Id Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs ------------ ----------- ------------ ------------ ------------10 10 UP UP 100
Configure both ends of the VLT interconnect trunk with identical PVST+ configurations. When you enable VLT, the show spanningtree pvst brief command output displays VLT information (refer to Verifying a VLT Configuration). Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 1000 brief VLAN 1000 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.9b79 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.
Figure 125. mVLT Configuration Example In Domain 1, configure Peer 1 first, then configure Peer 2. When that is complete, perform the same steps for the peer nodes in Domain 2. The interface used in this example is TenGigabitEthernet.
Add links to the mVLT port-channel on Peer 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 0/16 - 17 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-0/16-17)#port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-0/16-17)#port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-0/16-17)#no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2 Domain_1_Peer2#configure Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-1)#channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/8-9 Domain_1_Peer2#no s
Add links to the mVLT port-channel on Peer 3 Domain_2_Peer3(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 0/19 - 20 Domain_2_Peer3(conf-if-range-te-0/16-17)#port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_2_Peer3(conf-if-range-te-0/16-17)#port-channel 100 mode active Domain_2_Peer3(conf-if-range-te-0/16-17)#no shutdown Configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 4 Domain_2_Peer4#configure Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-1)#channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/8-9 Domain_1_Peer4#no shutdow
Configure the VLTi port as a static multicast router port for the VLAN. VLT_Peer1(conf)#interface vlan 4001 VLT_Peer1(conf-if-vl-4001)#ip igmp snooping mrouter interface port-channel 128 VLT_Peer1(conf-if-vl-4001)#exit VLT_Peer1(conf)#end Repeat these steps on VLT Peer Node 2. VLT_Peer2(conf)#ip multicast-routing VLT_Peer2(conf)#interface vlan 4001 VLT_Peer2(conf-if-vl-4001)#ip address 140.0.0.
Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN.
Verifying a Port-Channel Connection to a VLT Domain (From an Attached Access Switch) On an access device, verify the port-channel connection to a VLT domain. Dell_TORswitch(conf)# show running-config interface port-channel 11 ! interface Port-channel 11 no ip address switchport channel-member tengigabitethernet 1/18,22 no shutdown Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take System MAC mismatch A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. Verify that the unit ID of VLT peers is not the same on both units and that the MAC address is the same on both units. Unit ID mismatch The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state. The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state.
Keep the following points in mind when you configure VLT nodes in a PVLAN: • Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. • You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PVLAN Operations When One VLT Peer is Down When a VLT port moves to the Admin or Operationally Down state on only one of the VLT nodes, the VLT Lag is still considered to be up. All the PVLAN MAC entries that correspond to the operationally down VLT LAG are maintained as synchronized entries in the device. These MAC entries are removed when the peer VLT LAG also becomes inactive or a change in PVLAN configuration occurs.
Table 89.
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN). Because the VLT LAG interfaces are terminated on two different nodes, PVLAN configuration of VLT VLANs and VLT LAGs are symmetrical and identical on both the VLT peers. PVLANs provide Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same VLAN.
8 (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number peer-down-vlan vlan interface number The range is from 1 to 4094. Associating the VLT LAG or VLT VLAN in a PVLAN 1 Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2 Enable the port.
• Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for another host or router. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled. To disable proxy ARP, use the no proxy-arp command in the interface mode.
When a VLT node detects peer up, it will not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if peer routing is enabled on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
Configure VLT LAG as VLAN-Stack Access or Trunk Port Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-10)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#vlan-stack access Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag po
unit-id 1 Dell# Configure VLT LAG as VLAN-Stack Access or Trunk Port Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-10)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#vlan-stack access Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)
66 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Dell Networking OS supports virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN). The MASTER router is chosen from the virtual routers by an election process and forwards packets sent to the next hop IP address.
Figure 126. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables.
CP processor increases or decreases based on the dynamics of the network, the advertisement intervals in may increase or decrease accordingly. Table 90. Recommended VRRP Advertise Intervals Recommended Advertise Interval Groups/Interface Less than 250 1 second 255 Between 250 and 450 2–3 seconds 255 Between 450 and 600 3–4 seconds 255 VRRP Configuration By default, VRRP is not configured. Configuration Task List The following list specifies the configuration tasks for VRRP.
Example of Configuring VRRP Dell(conf)#int tengig 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# Example of Verifying the VRRP Configuration Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show conf ! interface Tengigabitethernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
Assign Virtual IP addresses Virtual routers contain virtual IP addresses configured for that VRRP group (VRID). A VRRP group does not transmit VRRP packets until you assign the Virtual IP address to the VRRP group. To activate a VRRP group on an interface (so that VRRP group starts transmitting VRRP packets), configure at least one virtual IP address in a VRRP group. The virtual IP address is the IP address of the virtual router and does not require the IP address mask.
virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 ! vrrp-group 222 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# The following example shows the same VRRP group (VRID 111) configured on multiple interfaces on different subnets. Example of Verifying the VRRP Group Priority Dell#do show vrrp -----------------Tengigabitethernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Version: 2 Net: 10.10.10.1 State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
Example of Verifying the VRRP Group Priority Dell#show vrrp -----------------Tengigabitethernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 2343, Gratuitous ARP sent: 5 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------Tengigabitethernet 1/2, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.2.
virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.10 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# Disabling Preempt The preempt command is enabled by default. The command forces the system to change the MASTER router if another router with a higher priority comes online. Prevent the BACKUP router with the higher priority from becoming the MASTER router by disabling preempt.
If are using VRRP version 3, you must configure the timer values in multiples of 25 centisecs. To change the advertisement interval in seconds or centisecs, use the following command. A centisecs is 1/100 of a second. 1 Change the advertisement interval setting. INTERFACE-VRID mode advertise-interval seconds The range is from 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 1 second. 2 For VRRPv3, change the advertisement centisecs interval setting.
NOTE: You can configure a tracked object for a VRRP group (using the track object-id command in INTERFACE-VRID mode) before you actually create the tracked object (using a track object-id command in CONFIGURATION mode). However, no changes in the VRRP group’s priority occur until the tracked object is defined and determined to be down. Tracking an Interface To track an interface, use the following commands.
Metric threshold down 255 up 254 First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 13/2 Tracked by: VRRP GigabitEthernet 7/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 13/2 Tracked by: VRRP GigabitEthernet 7/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Example of Viewing VRRP Configuration on an Interface Dell#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 1/3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 ip address 10.1.1.
This time is the gap between system boot up completion and VRRP enabling. The seconds range is from 0 to 900. The default is 0. Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI.
Figure 127. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Example of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 R2(conf)#int tengig 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#show conf ! interface Tengigabitethernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
-----------------Tengigabitethernet 2/31, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#int tengig 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.1.1.2/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#vrrp-group 99 R3(conf-if-te-3/21-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.
67 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter contains the following sections:.
L 128 L2L3 up 17:36:24 Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te 0/1 0/2 0/3 0/4 0/5 0/6 0/7 0/8 (Up) (Up) (Dwn) (Dwn) (Up) (Dwn) (Dwn) (Up) Dell#show uplink-state-group 1 detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down Uplink State Group Defer Timer Upstream Interfaces Downstream Interfaces 2 : : : : 1 10 Po Te Te (Dis): Interface disabled Status: Enabled, Up sec 128(Up) 0/1(Up) Te 0/2(Up) Te 0/3(Dwn) Te 0/4(Dwn) Te 0/5(Up) 0/6(Dwn) Te 0/7(Dwn) Te 0/8(Up) Verify that the downstream port channel in the top-of-
1 Display the current port mode for Aggregator L2 interfaces (show interfaces switchport interface command).. Dell#show interfaces switchport tengigabitethernet 0/1 Codes: U x G i - Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN tagged Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 802.
System Type: PE-FN-410S-IOA Control Processor: MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory, core(s) 1. 128M bytes of boot flash memory. 1 12-port GE/TE (FN) 12 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) Dell# Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications.
NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. The following warning message appears when you implement the offline stack-unit command: Warning - offline of unit will bring down all the protocols and the unit will be operationally down, except for running Diagnostics. Please make sure that stacking/fanout not configured for Diagnostics execution. Also reboot/online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued.
1 drwx 4096 Jan 17 2011 15:02:16 +00:00 . 2 drwx 4096 Jan 01 1980 00:00:00 +00:00 .. 3 -rwx 100583 Feb 11 2011 20:41:36 +00:00 failure_trace0_RPM0_CP flash: 2143281152 bytes total (2069291008 bytes free) Using the Show Hardware Commands The show hardware command tree consists of commands used with the Aggregator switch. These commands display information from a hardware sub-component and from hardware-based feature tables.
EXEC Privilege mode • show hardware stack-unit {0-5} unit {0-0} counters View the details of the FP Devices and Hi gig ports on the stack-unit. EXEC Privilege mode • show hardware stack-unit {0-5} unit {0-0} details Execute a specified bShell command from the CLI without going into the bShell. EXEC Privilege mode • show hardware stack-unit {0-5} unit {0-0} execute-shell-cmd {command} View the Multicast IPMC replication table from the bShell.
SFP+ 9 Datecode SFP+ 9 CheckCodeExt SFP+ 9 DOM is not supported = 110207 = 0xb3 Dell# Recognize an Over-Temperature Condition An overtemperature condition occurs, for one of two reasons: the card genuinely is too hot or a sensor has malfunctioned. Inspect cards adjacent to the one reporting the condition to discover the cause. • • If directly adjacent cards are not normal temperature, suspect a genuine overheating condition. If directly adjacent cards are normal temperature, suspect a faulty sensor.
-- Thermal Sensor Readings (deg C) Unit Sensor0 Sensor1 Sensor2 ------------------------------0 55 45 58 -- Dell# Recognize an Under-Voltage Condition If the system detects an under-voltage condition, it sends an alarm. To recognize this condition, look for the following system message: %CHMGR-1-CARD_SHUTDOWN: Major alarm: Line card 2 down - auto-shutdown due to under voltage. This message indicates that the specified card is not receiving enough power.
Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack-unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss. To troubleshoot packet loss, use the following commands.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Example of show hardware drops interface interface Dell#show hardware drops interface tengigabitethernet 2/1 Drops in Interface Te 2/1: --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops IBP CBP Full Drops PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops
Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU. The command output in the following example has been augmented, providing detailed RX/ TX packet statistics on a per-queue basis. The objective is to see whether CPU-bound traffic is internal (so-called party bus or IPC traffic) or network control traffic, which the CPU must process.
Displaying Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
--------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 5 (interface Fo 1/148) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 9 (interface Fo 1/152) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 13 (interface Fo 1/156) -------------------------
--------------------------------------UCAST 0 0 UCAST 1 0 UCAST 2 0 UCAST 3 0 UCAST 4 0 UCAST 5 0 UCAST 6 0 UCAST 7 0 UCAST 8 0 UCAST 9 0 UCAST 10 0 UCAST 11 0 MCAST 0 0 MCAST 1 0 MCAST 2 0 MCAST 3 0 MCAST 4 0 MCAST 5 0 MCAST 6 0 MCAST 7 0 MCAST 8 0 Restoring the Factory Default Settings Restoring factory defaults deletes the existing NVRAM settings, startup configuration and all configured settings such as stacking or fanout.
68 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 93.
Network Management The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for network management protocol. Table 95.
RFC# Full Name radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped 3635 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like Interface Types 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base: Ethernet Statistic
RFC# Full Name FORCE10-MONMIB Force10 Monitoring MIB FORCE10-PRODUCTS-MIB Force10 Product Object Identifier MIB FORCE10-SS-CHASSIS-MIB Force10 S-Series Enterprise Chassis MIB FORCE10-SMI Force10 Structure of Management Information FORCE10-SYSTEM-COMPONENT-MIB Force10 System Component MIB (enables the user to view CAM usage information) FORCE10-TC-MIB Force10 Textual Convention FORCE10-TRAP-ALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB FORCE10-FIPS NOOPING-MI B Force10 FIP Snooping MIB (Based on T11-FCoE
69 FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module. FC Flex IO Module mentioned in this guide refers to FCF Port Combo Card.
packets performed at the edge of the chassis itself, you can use the FN IOM that contains an FC Flex IO module to connect to a SAN environment without the need for a separate ToR switch to operate as NPIV proxy gateways. The FN IOM can function in NPIV proxy gateway mode when an FC Flex IO module is present or in the FIP snooping bridge (FSB) mode when all the ports are Ethernet ports. The FC Flex IO module uses the same baseboard hardware of the FN IOM and the FX2 chassis.
• There should a maximum of 64 server fabric login (FLOGI) requests or fabric discovery (FDISC) requests per server MAC address before forwarded by the FC Flex IO module to the FC core switch. Without user configuration, only 32 server login sessions are permitted for each server MAC address. To increase the total number of sessions to 64, use the max sessions command. • A distance of up to 300 meters is supported at 8 Gbps for Fibre Channel traffic.
Port Numbering for FC Flex IO Modules Even-numbered ports are at the bottom of the I/O panel and for modules odd-numbered ports are at the top of the I/O panel. When installed in a PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure, the FN IOM ports are numbered 33 to 56 from the bottom to the top of the switch. The following port numbering convention applies to the FC Flex IO module: • In expansion slot 0, the ports are numbered 41 to 44. • In expansion slot 1, the ports are numbered 49 to 52.
On FN IOM switches, you can configure the switch to operate in FIP Snooping or NPIV mode. If the FN IOM Switch functions in the NPIV mode and you attempt to set the uplink port to be an FCF or a bridge port, a warning message displays and the settings are not saved. Operation of the NPIV Proxy Gateway The NPIV application on the FC Flex IO module manages the FC functionalities configured in Dell Networking OS.
Figure 128. Installing and Configuring Flowchart for FC Flex IO Modules To see if a switch is running the latest Dell Networking OS version, use the show version command. To download a Dell Networking OS version, go to http://support.dell.com. Installation Site Preparation Before installing the switch or switches, make sure that the chosen installation location meets the following site requirements: • Clearance — There is adequate front and rear clearance for operator access.
1 Decrease the maximum temperature by 1°C (1.8°F) per 300 m (985 ft.) above 900 m (2955 ft.). 2 Relative Humidity — The operating relative humidity is 8 percent to 85 percent (non‑condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10 percent per hour.
• The CNA sends a FIP fabric login (FLOGI) request to the FC Flex IO module, which converts FLOGI to FDISC messages or processes any internally generated FC frames and sends these messages to the SAN environment. • When the FC fabric discovery (FDISC) accept message is received from the SAN side, the FC Flex IO module converts the FDISC message again into an FLOGI accept message and transmits it to the CNA.
Figure 130. Case 2: Deployment Scenario of Configuring FC Flex IO Modules Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) is supported on the FC Flex IO module installed in the FN IOM. Ethernet Enhancements in Data Center Bridging The following section describes DCB.
InterProcess Communication (IPC) traffic InterProcess Communication (IPC) traffic within high-performance computing clusters to share information. Server traffic is extremely sensitive to latency requirements. To ensure lossless delivery and latency-sensitive scheduling of storage and service traffic and I/O convergence of LAN, storage, and server traffic over a unified fabric, IEEE data center bridging adds the following extensions to a classical Ethernet network: • 802.
• If the negotiation fails and PFC is enabled on the port, any user-configured PFC input policies are applied. If no PFC input policy has been previously applied, the PFC default setting is used (no priorities configured). If you do not enable PFC on an interface, you can enable the 802.3x link-level pause function. By default, the link-level pause is disabled. • PFC supports buffering to receive data that continues to arrive on an interface while the remote system reacts to the PFC operation.
Traffic Groupings Description Group transmission selection algorithm (TSA) Type of queue scheduling a priority group uses. In the Dell Networking OS, ETS is implemented as follows: • ETS supports groups of 802.1p priorities that have: • PFC enabled or disabled • No bandwidth limit or no ETS processing • Bandwidth allocated by the ETS algorithm is made available after strict-priority groups are serviced.
All priorities that map to the same queue must be in the same priority group.Leave a space between each priority group number. For example: priority-pgid 0 0 0 1 2 4 4 4 in which priority group 0 maps to dot1p priorities 0, 1, and 2; priority group 1 maps to dot1p priority 3; priority group 2 maps to dot1p priority 4; priority group 4 maps to dot1p priorities 5, 6, and 7.
INTERFACE mode pfc priority priority-range You cannot configure PFC using the pfc priority command on an interface on which a DCB map has been applied or which is already configured for lossless queues (pfc no-drop queues command). Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface after you disable PFC mode in a DCB map and apply the map on the interface.
pfc no-drop queuesqueue-range Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx) DCBx allows a switch to automatically discover DCB-enabled peers and exchange configuration information. PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange and negotiate parameters with peer devices. DCBx capabilities include: • Discovery of DCB capabilities on peer-device connections. • Determination of possible mismatch in DCB configuration on a peer link. • Configuration of a peer device over a DCB link.
• Data center bridging exchange protocol • FCoE initialization protocol (FIP) snooping DCB processes virtual local area network (VLAN)-tagged packets and dot1p priority values. Untagged packets are treated with a dot1p priority of 0. For DCB to operate effectively, you can classify ingress traffic according to its dot1p priority so that it maps to different data queues. The dot1p-queue assignments used are shown in the following table.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Egress Queue Assignment 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 NOTE: If you reconfigure the global dot1p-queue mapping, an automatic re-election of the DCBX configuration source port is performed (refer to Configuration Source Election). Configure Enhanced Transmission Selection ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802.1p classes of converged Ethernet traffic. Different traffic types have different service needs.
• The CIN version supports two types of strict-priority scheduling: • Group strict priority: Use this to increase its bandwidth usage to the bandwidth total of the priority group and allow a single priority flow in a priority group. A single flow in a group can use all the bandwidth allocated to the group. • Link strict priority: Use this to increase to the maximum link bandwidth and allow a flow in any priority group. CIN supports only the dot1p priority-queue assignment in a priority group.
7 Apply the QoS output policy with the bandwidth percentage for specified priority queues to an egress interface. INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#service-policy output test12 Configure a DCBx Operation DCB devices use data center bridging exchange protocol (DCBx) to exchange configuration information with directly connected peers using the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) protocol.
• If the peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer is enabled. • If the received peer configuration is not compatible with the currently configured port configuration, the link with the DCBX peer port is disabled and a syslog message for an incompatible configuration is generated. The network administrator must then reconfigure the peer device so that it advertises a compatible DCB configuration.
NOTE: On a DCBx port, application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows: • The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port. • On auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports: • • If a configuration source is elected, the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration-source port.
Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch. • • If a configuration source is found, the received configuration is checked against the currently configured values that are internally propagated by the configuration source.
Figure 134. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: • For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
Configure DCBx operation at the interface level on a switch or globally on the switch. To configure an FN IOM switch for DCBx operation in a data center network, you must: 1 Configure ToR- and FCF-facing interfaces as auto-upstream ports. 2 Configure server-facing interfaces as auto-downstream ports. 3 Configure a port to operate in a configuration-source role. 4 Configure ports to operate in a manual role. 1 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode.
To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise DCBx-tlv pfc ets-reco. 6 On manual ports only: Configure the Application Priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBx peers. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] advertise DCBx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} • fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in Application Priority TLVs. • iscsi: enables the advertisement of iSCSI in Application Priority TLVs.
NOTE: You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time. You can only enable ETS recommend TLVs (ets-reco) if you enable ETS configuration TLVs (ets-conf). To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise DCBx-tlv pfc ets-reco. The default is All TLV types are enabled. 5 Configure the Application Priority TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role.
• Enable DCBx debugging. EXEC PRIVILEGE mode debug DCBx {all | auto-detect-timer | config-exchng | fail | mgmt | resource | sem | tlv} • all: enables all DCBx debugging operations. • auto-detect-timer: enables traces for DCBx auto-detect timers. • config-exchng: enables traces for DCBx configuration exchanges. • fail: enables traces for DCBx failures. • mgmt: enables traces for DCBx management frames. • resource: enables traces for DCBx system resource frames.
Example of the show dot1p-queue mapping Command Example of the show dcb Command Example of the show interfaces pfc summary Command Example of the show interface pfc statistics Command Example of the show interface ets summary Command Example of the show interface ets detail Command Example of the show stack-unit all stack-ports all pfc details Command Example of the show stack-unit all stack-ports all ets details Command Example of the show interface DCBx detail Command Dell(conf)# show dot1p-queue-mapping
The following table describes the show interface pfc summary command fields. Table 98. show interface pfc summary Command Description Fields Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Admin mode is on; Admin is enabled PFC Admin mode is on or off with a list of the configured PFC priorities . When PFC admin mode is on, PFC advertisements are enabled to be sent and received from peers; received PFC configuration takes effect.
Fields Description Application Priority TLV: Remote ISCSI Priority Map Status of iSCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from remote peer port: enabled or disabled. PFC TLV Statistics: Input TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs received. PFC TLV Statistics: Output TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted.
6 7 0% 0% Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Pkts ETS ETS TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields.
3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Pkts ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Table 99. show interface ets detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number.
Field Description ETS TLV Statistic: Error Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Error Configuration TLVs received.
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/49 Remote Mac Address 00:00:00:00:00:11 Port Role is Auto-Upstream DCBX Operational Status is Enabled Is Configuration Source? TRUE Local DCBX Compatibility mode is CEE Local DCBX Configured mode is CEE Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted: ErPfi Local DCBX Status ----------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBX Status: ---------------DCBX Operational
Field Description Local DCBx Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Protocol State Current operational state of DCBx protocol: ACK or IN-SYNC. Peer DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs received from peer device.
Figure 135. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
dot1p Value in Incoming Frame Queue Assignment 6 3 7 3 The following describes the dot1p-priority class group assignment dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Priority Group Assignment 0 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 3 SAN 4 IPC 5 LAN 6 LAN 7 LAN The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment.
Interworking of DCB Map With DCB Buffer Threshold Settings The dcb-input and dcb-output configuration commands are deprecated. You must use the dcp-map command to create a DCB map to configure priority flow control (PFC) and enhanced transmission selection (ETS) on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic. Configure the dcb-buffer-threshold command and its related parameters only on ports with either auto configuration or dcb-map configuration.
NPIV Proxy Gateway for FC Flex IO Modules The N-port identifier virtualization (NPIV) Proxy Gateway (NPG) feature provides FCoE-FC bridging capability on the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module switch, allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module.
Servers use CNA ports to connect over FCoE to an Ethernet port in ENode mode on the NPIV proxy gateway. FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled and configured on the M1000e gateway to prevent unauthorized access and data transmission to the SAN network (see FCoE Transit). FIP is used by server CNAs to discover an FCoE switch operating as an FCoE forwarder (FCF).
Table 101. FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module NPIV Proxy Gateway: Terms and Definitions Term Description FC port Fibre Channel port on the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module FC module that operates in autosensing, 2, 4, or 8-Gigabit mode. On an NPIV proxy gateway, an FC port can be used as a downlink for a server connection and an uplink for a fabric connection. F port Port mode of an FC port connected to an end node (N) port on the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway.
By default, no PFC and ETS settings in a DCB map are applied to FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet ports when they are enabled. On the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module NPG, you must configure PFC and ETS parameters in a DCB map and then apply the map to server-facing Ethernet ports (see the “Creating a DCB map" section). FCoE Maps An FCoE map is used to identify the SAN fabric to which FCoE storage traffic is sent.
Enabling Fibre Channel Capability on the Switch Enable the FC Flex IO module on the FN IOM that you want to configure as an NPG for the Fibre Channel protocol. When you enable Fibre Channel capability, FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled on all VLANs on the switch, using the default FCoE transit settings. 1 Enable the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module for the Fibre Channel protocol.
As a result, PFC and lossless port queues are disabled on 802.1p priorities, and all priorities are mapped to the same priority queue and equally share port bandwidth. • To change the ETS bandwidth allocation configured for a priority group in a DCB map, do not modify the existing DCB map configuration. Instead, create a new DCB map with the desired PFC and ETS settings, and apply the new map to the interfaces to override the previous DCB map settings.
Creating an FCoE Map An FCoE map consists of: • An association between the dedicated VLAN, used to carry FCoE traffic, and the SAN fabric where the storage arrays are installed. Use a separate FCoE VLAN for each fabric to which the FCoE traffic is forwarded. Any non-FCoE traffic sent on a dedicated FCoE VLAN is dropped. • The FC-MAP value, used to generate the fabric-provided MAC address (FPMA). The FPMA is used by servers to transmit FCoE traffic to the fabric.
FCoE MAP mode fka-adv-period seconds Applying an FCoE Map on Server-facing Ethernet Ports You can apply multiple FCoE maps on an Ethernet port or port channel. When you apply an FCoE map on a server-facing port or port channel: • The port is configured to operate in hybrid mode (accept both tagged and untagged VLAN frames). • The associated FCoE VLAN is enabled on the port or port channel.
2 Apply the FCoE and FC fabric configurations in an FCoE map to the port. Repeat this step to apply an FCoE map to more than one FC port. INTERFACE FIBRE_CHANNEL mode fabric map-name Dell# interface fi 0/9 Dell(config-if-fc-0/9)# fabric SAN_FABRIC_A 3 Enable the port for FC transmission.
Dell(config-fcoe-name)# fc-map 0efc00 Dell(config-fcoe-name)# keepalive Dell(config-fcoe-name)# fcf-priority 128 Dell(config-fcoe-name)# fka-adv-period 8 5 Enable an upstream FC port: Dell(config)# interface fibrechannel 0/0 Dell(config-if-fc-0)# no shutdown 6 Enable a downstream Ethernet port: Dell(config)#interface tengigabitEthernet 0/0 Dell(conf-if-te-0)# no shutdown Displaying NPIV Proxy Gateway Information To display information on the NPG operation, use the show commands in the following table Ta
Fc Fc Fc Fc Fc Fc Fc Fc Fc Fc Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te Te 0/2 0/3 0/4 0/5 0/6 0/7 0/8 0/9 0/10 0/11 1/12 1/13 1/14 1/15 1/16 1/17 1/18 1/19 1/20 1/21 Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Up Down Down Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto 10000 Mbit Full Auto Auto Auto Auto --------------------- Table 103.
FKA-ADV-Period Fcf Priority Config-State Oper-State Members Fc 0/0 Te 0/14 Te 0/16 8 128 ACTIVE UP Table 104. show fcoe-map Field Descriptions Field Description Fabric-Name Name of a SAN fabric. Fabric ID The ID number of the SAN fabric to which FC traffic is forwarded. VLAN ID The dedicated VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic between servers and a fabric over the NPG. The configured VLAN ID must be the same as the fabric ID. VLAN priority FCoE traffic uses VLAN priority 3.
Table 105. show qos dcb-map Field Descriptions Field Description State Complete: All mandatory DCB parameters are correctly configured. In progress: The DCB map configuration is not complete. Some mandatory parameters are not configured. PFC Mode PFC configuration in the DCB map: On (enabled) or Off. PG Priority group configured in the DCB map. TSA Transmission scheduling algorithm used in the DCB map: Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS).
Field Description Login Method Method used by the server CNA to log in to the fabric; for example: FLOGI - ENode logged in using a fabric login (FLOGI). FDISC - ENode logged in using a fabric discovery (FDISC).
Field Description FCoE VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic from a server CNA to a fabric and configured on both the server-facing FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module port and server CNA port. Fabric Map Name of the FCoE map containing the FCoE/FC configuration parameters for the server CNA-fabric connection. Enode WWPN Worldwide port name of the server CNA port. Enode WWNN Worldwide node name of the server CNA. FCoE MAC Fabric-provided MAC address (FPMA).
